BETTING REGULATION APPROVED by Order No DI-32 of the Director of the Gaming Control Authority Under the Ministry of Finance of T

BETTING REGULATION APPROVED BY Order No DI-32 of the Director of the Gaming Control Authority under the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Lithuania of 21 January 2016 AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS APPROVED BY Order No DI-88 of the Director of the Gaming Control Authority under the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Lithuania of 25 February 2016 AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS APPROVED BY Order No DI-473 of the Director of the Gaming Control Authority under the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Lithuania of 12 August 2016

REMOTE GAMING REGULATIONS of Lošimų strateginė grupė UAB Vilnius, 2016 I. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. Lošimų strateginė grupė UAB (hereinafter referred to as the “Company”) registered at the address I. Šimulionio g. 5, Vilnius, shall operate remote gaming (remote betting, remote table games and remote gaming by A category gaming machines) in accordance with the Republic of Lithuania Gaming Law (hereinafter referred to as the “GL”), other legal acts and the Remote Gaming Regulation (hereinafter referred to as the “Regulation”). The website of the Company shall be www.Betsafe.lt. 2. The terms used in the present Regulation shall correspond to the terms used in the GL. The definitions not provided for in the GL shall be as follows: 2.1. The “betting event that has occurred” shall mean a betting event published in the betting offers which has actually occurred and in which the entities or units that in the betting offers are indicated as the participants of the betting event have actually participated. 2.2. The “outcome of the betting event” shall mean an outcome of the betting event and/or possible options of the outcome of the betting event (the possible options of the outcome of the betting event shall be indicated in the betting offers). 2.3. The “participant of the betting event” shall mean an entity or unit directly participating in the betting event. 2.4. The “betting event operator” shall mean an entity organising a sports competition or another event or action the outcome of which is to be guessed by the player as recommended by the Company. 2.5. The “betting odds” shall mean the number set by the Company the multiplying of which by the amount placed by the player in accordance with the procedure prescribed herein shows the winning. 2.6. The “player payment account” shall mean a personal account opened in the name of the player at any bank or another payment institution (e.g. electronic money institution) which shall be used by the player for payments to the player’s betting account and acceptance of disbursements from the player betting account. 2.7. The “player betting account” shall mean a virtual player betting account registered within the Company’s direct communication system on the basis of the remote gaming contract in which all funds credited by the player for betting in advance and all amounts of money won in remote betting are accounted. 2.8. The “gaming offers” shall mean a list of betting outcomes offered on the Company’s website with the odds attributed to them, a list of remote gaming by A category gaming machines including the provided rules and other relevant information in relation to the remote gaming operated on the Company’s website. The rules of remote gaming by A category gaming machines and other information shall be laid down in Annex 1 hereto. 2.9. The “terms and conditions of discounts” shall mean the rules that must be observed in order to use a discount offer put forward by the Company. 2.10. The “remote gaming” shall mean the remote betting operated on the Company’s website (hereinafter referred to as the “remote betting”, “betting”) and remote table games and remote gaming by A category gaming machines. 2.11. The “official sources of information” shall mean the website of the betting event operator or the participant of the betting event, public notices in public or specialised means of information and, in the absence thereof, specialised websites. 2.12. The “stake amount” shall mean an amount of money paid in by the player from his/her player betting account when participating in remote betting. 2.13. The “live betting” shall mean a possibility to place a bet after the betting event has started, but not later than till the end of the betting provided by the Company. 3. The Regulation and the gaming offers shall be published on the Company’s website. The Regulation shall also be publicly available at the Company’s betting stations. Each player shall be entitled to have access to the Regulation at any betting station of the Company and request that the betting intermediary explained the provisions of the Regulation during the working hours of the betting station. 4. Ignorance of the Regulation cannot constitute grounds for cancellation of the stake amounts. Acceptance of a bet shall imply that the player has familiarised himself/herself with the Regulation and the gaming offers and understands them and voluntarily places a bet. In the event of any disputes over remote betting, the player shall not be entitled to rely on ignorance and/or incorrect understanding of the Regulation and/or offers. 5. All gathered information on the players, bets placed thereby or winnings received shall be deemed to be confidential and may be disclosed only in accordance with the procedure prescribed in the legislation. 6. The player shall be entitled to participate in remote gaming by placing an unlimited number of bets provided that no restrictions envisaged in the law or established by the player himself/herself are applicable. 7. The Company shall be entitled at any time to change the gaming offers by publishing this on the Company’s website in advance. The bets that have already been accepted shall remain valid and shall not be changed. 8. The Company shall keep centralised accounts of acceptance of payments and disbursement of winnings. II. LOCATION OF REMOTE GAMING 9. The location of remote gaming shall be deemed to be the place where remote gaming services are provided. III. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PLAYERS 10. A player betting account may be opened on the basis of the remote gaming contract to the persons who are over 18 years old. If it becomes evident that a player betting account was opened for the person under 18 years old, the Company shall close such account, cancel the placed bets and repay the remaining balance of money credited in the player betting account to the player's payment account as provided for in

the remote gaming contract and the remote gaming contract shall be terminated. 11. The Company shall be entitled to restrict participation in remote betting for the persons who breach the provisions of the Regulation or play in a bad faith manner. The Company shall also be entitled to limit the maximum stake amount for such players without any further notice. 12. The Company shall be entitled to exclude the persons whose behaviour raises reasonable suspicion that their actions could cause damage to the Company from participation in remote betting. 13. The Company shall report the persons suspected of fraud or other unlawful actions to pre-trial investigation institutions, the Gaming Control Authority under the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Lithuania (hereinafter referred to as the “Control Authority”) and/or other competent authorities. IV. PLAYER BETTING ACCOUNT Registration of the Player Betting Account 14. A person willing to participate in the remote betting operated on the Company’s website must enter into a remote betting contract the form of which is approved by the Control Authority with the Company before such participation. Conclusion of a remote gaming contract shall be regulated by the GL. 15. When concluding a remote gaming contract in electronic format the player shall submit a valid identity document bearing the photograph and other documents that may be additionally requested by the Company at its own discretion in a designated place on the Company’s website (a special form in which the player may place electronic documents and/or scanned copies of paper documents shall be provided to the player on the Company’s website). 16. The player betting account shall be registered in the Company’s direct communication system only after establishing that the person meets the requirements provided for in the GL and the Regulation and concluding a remote gaming contract. 17. In pursuance of preventing the use of the same player betting account by a third party, the Company shall reserve the right to request additional information and documents even after registration of the player betting account. If a player fails to provide additionally requested documents within 30 days from the date of such request or the provided information or documents are false or misleading, the Company shall terminate the remote gaming contract with the player, block the player betting account, cancel the placed bets and repay the balance of money placed on the player betting account to the player payment account. If the provided documents are false, the Company shall also carry out the actions set out in Paragraph 13 hereof. 18. The player shall be liable for provision of correct information and data. 19. The Company shall be entitled to carry out a verification of players by phone. During the verification of players the Company’s employees shall contact a player by the telephone number indicated by him/her at the moment of registration and pose questions concerning the player betting account and other questions in relation to remote gaming. The verification shall be aimed at determining if the player gaming account is not used in a bad faith manner, for unlawful or fraudulent activities. If in the course of the verification of players it becomes evident that the player gaming account is used by third parties or there exist other forms of fraud, the Company shall terminate the remote gaming contract concluded with the player, cancel the player’s bets, repay the balance of the money paid into the player betting account to the player payment account and permanently close the player betting account. 20. A virtual player betting account in which the amounts of money paid in by the player in advance and intended for remote gaming are accounted shall be registered in the Company’s database on the basis of the remote gaming contract. The player shall be entitled to have only one player betting account at the same time. 21. The Company shall be entitled to terminate a remote gaming contract with the player if he/she acts in a bad faith manner (for example, seeks to participate in betting if the Company makes a material mistake). In such case, the balance of money available in the player betting account shall be repaid to the payer payment account. 22. The Company shall reserve the right to refuse to enter into a remote gaming contract and register a new player betting account or at any time terminate the remote betting contract and close the player betting account by repaying the balance of the amount paid in to the player payment account and/or limit the stake amounts without providing any additional explanation to the player. Crediting of the Player Betting Account 23. The player may at any time credit his/her player betting account from the player payment account opened in the name of the player. If a player credits the player betting account by a bank transfer from his/her payment account, the payment order may state that the transferred amount is intended for crediting the player betting account. Having received data on the carried out payment transaction from the payment institution, the Company shall credit the player betting account according to the data identifying the player within two days. 24. The minimum amount for crediting the player betting account shall be EUR 3.00. 25. Transfer of money from one player’s betting account to another player’s betting account shall not be possible. Use of the Player Betting Account 26. A player willing to participate in the remote betting operated on the Company’s website and play and place bets shall follow the Regulation, the visual instructions provided on the website of the Company and the rules of the respective game provided for herein. The data shall be deemed to be received when the data sent by the player access the Company’s direct communication system. 27. In all cases, the stake amount cannot be higher than the amount available in the player’s gaming account. 28. The bets placed in breach of the provisions of the Regulation shall be cancelled. Validity of the Player Betting Account 29. The player betting account shall be valid till it is closed by the player himself/herself at own discretion or till it is closed by the Company or till expiry of the remote gaming contract as provided for in the GL or the remote gaming contract. 30. The Company shall be entitled to unilaterally block the player betting account on a temporary basis and prevent the player from using the account in the following cases: 30.1. the Company has reasonable suspicions that the player has plaid and/or won in remote betting in a bad faith manner including, but not limited to the cases where the player used technical or other measures aimed at enjoying an unfair advantage over other players; 30.2. the Company has reasonable suspicions that the player possibly participates in remote betting from the jurisdiction in which such activities are prohibited and/or restricted and/or otherwise controlled; 30.3. the player’s actions cause serious threat to the Company’s activities (operations) and/or result in unreasonable losses to the Company and/or in other cases provided for in the legislation. 31. If in the cases set out in paragraph 30 hereof the Company block’s the player betting account, the Company shall immediately, but not later than within 3 (three) working days indicate to the player (sending to the e-mail address indicated in player remote gaming contract) the reasons explaining such blocking and, where possible, copies of the supporting documents or other data. The player shall be obliged to furnish the Company with information (information shall be provided by the means referred to in Paragraph 154 hereof) that the circumstances due to which the player betting account has been temporarily blocked have

disappeared or specify the reasons for which the Company should unblock the account not later than within 5 (five) working days from the receipt of information provided for herein. Having received the above information, the Company shall immediately, but not later than within 10 (ten) working days examine the information and provide the respective response of unblocking or termination of the remote gaming contract and closing of the player betting account to the player (the response shall be sent to the e-mail address indicated by the player in the remote gaming contract concluded with the player). In case where the player fails to provide the Company with any information within the time limit set in the present paragraph hereof (which may be unilaterally extended by the Company twice each time for 20 (twenty) working days) or the provided information is not sufficient and the circumstances set out in Paragraph 30 are still relevant, the Company shall unilaterally terminate the remote gaming contract and close the player betting account. 32. In the cases provided for in Paragraph 10 hereof and the present section, the Company shall immediately, but not later than within 5 (five) working days repay the balance of the amount available in the player betting account to the player payment account. V. DISCOUNTS General Terms and Conditions of Application of Discounts 33. The General Terms and Conditions of Application of Discounts shall be applicable for remote betting and remote table games. The General Terms and Conditions of Application of Discounts shall be applicable to remote table games only in so far as they are not contrary to the Terms and Conditions of Application of Discounts on Remote Table Games provided for in Paragraphs 44-48 hereof. 34. Should the Company decide to apply discounts, it shall publish on its website that all games or the particular game are/is subject to one discount or several discounts for certain period or periodically. 35. A decision to apply a discount shall be taken by the general manager of the Company or an authorised person thereof by issuing an order which shall be deemed to be an integral part hereof. The order shall indicate the types of applicable discounts, the terms and conditions of application of discounts, discount collection and application term and the particular rates of the discounts. 36. The particular discount offer for one player betting account shall be applicable only once provided that the discount offer and the terms and conditions do not provide for otherwise. 37. Discounts shall be registered in the Company’s database. 38. The discount terms and conditions may be fulfilled in parts and the discount shall be allowed after fulfilment of the respective part of the discount terms and conditions provided that this is envisaged in the discount offer. 39. In fulfilment of the discount terms and conditions the player shall be entitled to freely dispose of his/her own paid in funds and not to comply with the discount terms and conditions unless the particular discount terms and conditions provide for otherwise. 40. The discount shall become valid only if all discount terms and conditions are partially, fully and/or otherwise satisfied as published in the particular discount offer. 41. A player who fails to fully or partially satisfy the discount terms and conditions shall not acquire the right to the discount. 42. The Company shall reserve the right to remove any discounts and winnings that have been obtained by fraud if it suspected that the discount offer has been misused. 43. The Company shall reserve the right at any time at its own discretion to amend the discount terms and conditions by giving a prior notice on the website of the Company. Terms and Conditions of Application of Discounts on Remote Table Games 44. A separate order of the general manager or the authorised person thereof shall provide for that a remote table game discount offer may be applied together with a remote betting discount offer. 45. The terms and conditions of the remote table gaming may be complied with in parts and the discounts shall be allowed upon fulfilment of the respective part of the terms and conditions of the discount provided that this is indicated in the discount offer. 46. The terms and conditions of the remote table gaming shall be fulfilled only through participation in remote table games. 47. A remote table gaming discount may be used only once. Only one remote table gaming discount maybe allowed to the player at the same time unless otherwise provided for in the terms and conditions of application of discounts by the Company in advance.

VI. CASH-OUT

48. The “cash-out” shall mean the player’s action where he/she accepts the Company’s offer: (a) to withdraw a part of the winning or (b) withdraw a part of the stake amount. 49. The Company shall be entitled to offer to players to cash out the stake amount. The particular betting events and bets subject to cash-out shall be determined at the Company’s discretion in each particular case and marked with special cash-out visual means on the website. 50. Each cash-out offer placed by the Company shall state the particular part of the winning or part of the stake amount that may be cashed out by the player. The terms and conditions of the offer made by the Company shall vary depending on the course of the betting event, information on the start of the betting event or another factor. Should the player accept the particular cash-out offer of the Company, the offer shall be forthwith fulfilled without any changes. 51. The Company shall be entitled to put forward partial cash-out offers to the players. The partial cash-out shall mean a cash-out of the stake amount where only a part of the stake amount chosen by the player is used for cash-out. The part of the stake amount not chosen by the player shall be subject to the terms and conditions under which the bet was placed and the partially cashed out amount shall be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 47 or Paragraph 48 hereof. 52. If the player accepts the Company’s cash-out offer by withdrawing a part of the winning and the Company approves such action of the player, the part of the winning with which the player agreed by accepting the particular offer of the Company shall be immediately transferred to the player betting account. In this case, the player shall lose the possibility to win the remaining amount of possible winning under the bet. In this case, a part disbursed to the player shall at all times be higher than the stake amount of equivalent amount. 53. If the player accepts the Company’s offer to cash out the stake amount by withdrawing a part of the stake amount and the Company approves such action of the player, such part of the stake amount to which the player agrees by accepting the particular offer of the Company shall be immediately transferred to the player betting account. In this case, the player shall lose the possibility to win the amount that may be won during the particular bet and lose a part of the stake amount. In this case, the part disbursed to the player shall at all times be lower than the stake amount. 54. The bet cash-out offers shall be deemed to constitute a part of the remote betting offers of the Company and shall not be binding upon the players. 55. A bet cash-out offer shall be deemed to be chosen (accepted) where the player clicks on the active reference “Cash-out” near the particular placed bet and confirm that the terms and conditions of the particular offer of the Company (withdrawn part of the winning, withdrawn stake amount) are acceptable to the player.

56. The player shall not be obliged to carry out any other additional actions, except for the actions referred to in Paragraph 50 hereof. 57. If the Company places a bet cash-out offer, it shall be entitled to refuse to confirm the player’s choice to take up the proposal. 57.1. The Company shall be entitled to cancel a bet cash-out if (a) the bet cash-out is carried out after the betting event; (b) when putting forward a bet cash-out amount or confirming it the Company makes a material mistake; (c) the player seeks to take advantage of the bet cash-out offers in a bad faith manner. 58. In the event of taking up a bet cash-out offer, the original odds on the basis of which the bet was placed and the terms and conditions of the bet cash-out offer under which the stake amount was cashed out shall be displayed in the player’s betting history. The betting history shall also show the amount transferred by the Company to the player’s betting account. The examples of bet cash-outs could be as follows: The player has placed a bet in the match Lietuvos Rytas - Žalgiris and has chosen the victory of Lietuvos Rytas: After 20 minutes of the match Lietuvos Rytas was 5 scores ahead and the player has received an offer to withdraw a part of possible winning. After 20 minutes of the match Lietuvos Rytas was defeated by 5 scores and the player has received an offer to withdraw a part of the stake amount. As a rule, a bet cash-out offer withdrawing a part of the winning shall be placed to the player when the course of betting is favourable to the player, but the final result is not clear yet. As a rule, a bet cash-out offer withdrawing a part of the stake amount shall be placed to the player when the course of the betting is favourable to the Company, but the final result is not clear yet. VII. BETTING OFFERS 59. The standard scheme of betting offers shall be as follows: 59.1. data on the betting event: betting event sequence number, preliminary date and time, type of sports, name of the tournament; 59.2. name of the first team; 59.3. name of the second team; 59.4. odds of the outcomes of the betting events and the terms and conditions in relation to the outcomes of the betting event. 60. The abbreviations typically used in the betting offers: 1 – First team 2 – Second team X – Draw 1X – First team or draw 2X – Second team or draw 12 – First team or second team 61. The Company shall be entitled to make special betting offers to a separate group of players (for example, players born on the respective day, players who concluded their betting contracts in the particular betting station and according to other objective criteria) publishing this in the betting stations and on own website. 62. A grammatical error in the betting offers which does not change the meaning of the terms and conditions of betting cannot be deemed to be a reason for cancellation of the betting. VIII. TYPES OF BETS 63. The “single bet” shall mean a bet with one outcome of the betting chosen. The winning shall be established by multiplying the stake amount by the pre-determined betting odds and shall depend only on the correct guess of the outcome of the betting event. An example of the single bet could be as follows: Suppose that the betting offers include around 100 sports betting events and the player chooses one event Barcelona - Real M. and wants to place a bet for the victory of Barcelona. The betting odds set for the victory of Barcelona in the betting offers are 3.3. This means that in case of placing a bet of EUR 10 for the victory ofBarcelona and if Barcelona wins, the player would win EUR 33 (10×3.3=33). 64. The “combined bet” shall mean a bet with more than one outcome of the betting event chosen. A combined bet shall be deemed to be successful if all outcomes of the betting event included in the combined bet are correctly guessed. In case of a combined bet, the player may choose from 2 to 30 outcomes of the betting event. If at least one guess indicated in the betting slip is incorrect, it shall be deemed that the player has lost the total combined bet and no winning including the stake amount shall be disbursed to him. When calculating the winning the stake amount shall be multiplied by the total (multiplied with each other) betting odds of the chosen outcomes of the single betting events included in the combined bet. The events determining each other cannot be combined. The events determining each other shall be such betting events where the outcome of one betting event has a direct impact on the outcome of the other betting event (for example, the following outcome of the betting events cannot be combined: outcome “Žalgiris will become the champion of the Lithuanian Basketball League (LKL)” and the outcome “Žalgiriswill win in the semi-finals of the Lithuanian Basketball League (LKL)”, since the above events determine each other, i.e. Žalgiris cannot become a champion if it is defeated in the semi-finals of the Lithuanian Basketball League (LKL)”). An example of the combined bet could be as follows: Suppose that the player has chosen three betting events: Barcelona – Real M., Juventus – Inter and Žalgiris – FBK Kaunas. From the point of view of the player, the home teams should be the winners (the home teams are indicated first in all betting events). The betting odds of Barcelona are 3, the betting odds of Juventus are 2, and the betting odds of Žalgiris are 3. If the player places a bet of EUR 10 and the player is successful, the stake amount shall be multiplied by the product of the betting odds. In case of correct guess of all outcomes of the betting event, the player’s winning would be EUR 180 (10x(3x2x3)=180); if the guess of at least one is incorrect, the player shall lose and the stake amount shall belong to the Company. 65. The “systemic bet” shall mean a bet with more than one outcome of the betting event chosen. In case of a systemic bet, each outcome of the betting event shall be at least once linked to another outcome. The winning shall be determined by adding up the winnings for all guessed outcomes. The number of betting events and the number of possible not guessed outcomes shall be chosen by the player. The bet shall be characterised by the following parameters: 1) the number of betting events which may not be lower than 3; 2) the number of possible mistakes. An example of the systemic bet could be as follows: Suppose that the player has chosen a systemic bet “2 of 3”. This shall imply that the systemic bet includes 3 betting events and the bet may be successful if the player makes not more than one mistake. Thus, for example, in case of a systemic bet for the betting event Barcelona – Real M. the victory of Barcelona with the odds 2.5 is chosen (Outcome A), in the betting event Juventus – Inter the victory of Juventus with the odds 3.0 is chosen (Outcome B) and in the betting event Žalgiris – FBK Kaunas the victory of Žalgiriswith the odds 4.0 is chosen (Outcome C); in case of choosing the system “2 of 3” and placing a bet of EUR 1 for each combination, the maximum possible winning shall be as follows: (Outcome A x Outcome B) x EUR 1 + (Outcome B x Outcome C) x EUR 1 + (Outcome C x Outcome A) x EUR 1 = (2.5 x 3.0) x EUR 1 + (3.0 x 4.0) x EUR 1 + (4.0 x 2.5) x EUR 1 = EUR

7.5 + EUR 12 + EUR 10 = EUR 29.5. If the player fails to guess at least one event, the odds of the outcome of each not guessed betting event shall be deemed to be equal to 0. For example, in case of a systemic bet, the player has failed to guess Outcome A, then the winning for the above bet shall be as follows: (Outcome A x Outcome B) x EUR 1 + (Outcome B x Outcome C) x EUR 1 + (Outcome C x Outcome A) x EUR 1 = (0 x 3.0) x EUR 1 + (3.0 x 4.0) x EUR 1 + (4.0 x 0) x EUR 1 = EUR 12. If the player fails to guess two events in the system “2 of 3”, the player shall lose the systemic bet. 66. The “conditional bet” shall mean a bet with one outcome of the betting event chosen where such outcome is linked to the additional condition upon occurrence of which the incorrect guess of the outcome of the betting event shall not be deemed to be a failure of the player (the betting odds shall be equivalent to 1 and the player may recover the stake amount within 45 calendar days from the date of emergence of the additional condition). In case where the player guesses the chosen outcome of the betting event, his/her winning shall be determined as in case of a single bet, i.e. by multiplying the stake amount by the pre- determined betting odds, i.e. the winning shall depend on the correct guess of the outcome of the betting and the additional condition shall be irrelevant. An example of the conditional bet could be as follows: Suppose that the player chooses the event Barcelona - Real M. with the additional condition “Barcelona will score 2 goals” and wants to place a bet for the victory of Barcelona. The set betting odds for the victory of Barcelona in the betting offers are 3.3. This implies that if the player places a bet of EUR 10 for the victory ofBarcelona and Barcelona wins, he/she would win EUR 33 (10×3.3=33). In case of success of Real M., the player would lose. If Real M. wins, but the additional condition, i.e. “Barcelona will score 2 goals” occurs, the player shall not be deemed to have lost and may recover the stake amount. 67.The “stop bet” shall mean a bet with more than one outcome of the betting chosen (combined bet) with the possibility to cash out of the winning which shall be disbursed after applying additional winning reducing odds (reduction odds), before all outcomes of the betting chosen in the combined betting become evident, i.e. if the player guesses one outcome or several outcomes of the betting in case of a combined bet (before any of the outcomes chosen by the player in the combined bet which he has failed to guess becomes evident), till the moment of the start of the event(s) in which the outcome(s) of the betting events chosen by the player in the combined bet which were not clear become(s) evident, the player may stop the combined bet (the betting odds of the outcomes of the betting events chosen by the player in the combined bet which are not clear yet shall be equivalent to 1 and the betting shall be deemed to be cancelled) and cash out the winning which is equivalent to the total result of the product of the betting odds included in the combined bet (multiplied by each other) multiplied by the reduction odds which shall depend on the number of outcomes chosen in the combined bet which are still not clear after stopping the bet: If 1 outcome remains unclear, the reduction odds shall be equal to 0.9; If 2 outcomes remain unclear, the reduction odds shall be equal to 0.8; If 3 outcomes remain unclear, the reduction odds shall be equal to 0.7; If 4 outcomes remain unclear, the reduction odds shall be equal to 0.6; If 5 and more outcomes remain unclear, the reduction odds shall be equal to 0.5. If before stopping the betting event at least one of the guesses of the player about the outcomes of the betting events in a combined bet is incorrect, the player shall not be entitled to make use of the possibility to stop the combined bet and shall be deemed to have lost the whole combined bet and no winning including the stake amount shall be disbursed to him/her. If the player fails to make use of the possibility to stop the combined bet, the stop bet shall be deemed to be equivalent to the combined bet and shall be deemed to be won if all outcomes of the betting events included in the combined bet are guessed (in case of this bet, the winning shall be calculated under the same procedure as in case of a combined bet). The stop bet shall be applicable in the Company when it becomes possible in technical terms and after publishing this on the Company’s website and in the Company’s betting stations. An example of the stop bet could be as follows: Suppose that the player chooses three betting events: Barcelona – Real M., Juventus - Inter and Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas. The player chooses that the home teams should be the winners (the home teams are indicated first in all betting events) in the above betting events and the player places a bet of EUR 10 for the above combination. The betting odds of Barcelona are 3, the betting odds of Juventus are 2, and the betting odds of Žalgiris are 3. The chosen betting events take place in the following order: Barcelona - Real M.,Juventus - Inter and Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas. If after the betting event Barcelona - Real M. the winners are Barcelona (the betting events Juventus - Inter and Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas must be not started), the player shall be entitled to stop the bet without waiting for the outcome of the betting events Juventus - Inter and Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas (the betting odds of the outcomes of the betting events shall be equivalent to 1 and the betting shall be deemed to be cancelled), cash out the winning which would be equal to EUR 24 ((10x3)x0.8=24). If after the betting events Barcelona - Real M. and Juventus - Inter the winners are Barcelona and Juventus teams (the betting event Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas must be not started), the player shall be entitled to stop the bet without waiting for the outcome of the betting event Žalgiris - FBK Kaunas (the betting odds of the outcomes of the betting events shall be equivalent to 1 and the betting shall be deemed to be cancelled) and shall cash out the winning which would be equal to EUR 54 ((10x(3x2))x0.9=54). If all outcomes of the betting events are correctly guessed, the player’s winning would amount to EUR 180 (10x(3x2x3)=180). If the player fails to guess any of the outcomes and does not make use of the possibility, he/she shall be deemed to have lost the combined bet and no winning including the stake amount of EUR 10 shall be disbursed to him/her. IX. OTHER POSSIBLE OPTIONS OF THE OUTCOMES OF BETTING EVENTS 68. The possible options of the outcomes of betting events shall be published in the betting offers. 69. The options of the outcomes of betting events typically used in the betting offers shall be as follows: 69.1. The “handicap” shall mean an option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event where after the outcome of the betting event the respective number (goals, scores etc.) is added to (if the sign “-“ is indicated, the respective number should be deducted) the final result of the chosen team or participant. The following options of handicap shall be distinguished: 69.1.1. The “Asian handicap” shall mean an option where, in case of choosing the option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event “Asian handicap” where after the outcome of the betting event the respective handicap (goals, scores etc.) is added to (if the sign “-“ is indicated, the respective number should be deducted) the final result of the chosen team or participant. If after summing up the result of the betting event with the handicap, the result of the betting event (including the handicap) is to the benefit of the chosen team or the participant, the bet shall be deemed to be successful. If, taking into account the handicap, the result is to the benefit of the opposite team or participant, the bet shall be deemed to be lost. If, having evaluated the handicap, the result becomes a tie, the bet shall be deemed to be equal to 1 (one). (Example) If in case of a match Žalgiris (Kaunas) - Lietuvos Rytas (Vilnius) the player chooses the handicap of Žalgiris (Kaunas) (3), if the match ends up with the result 75:72, the player betting slip shall win, since, taking into account the handicap for the benefit of the chosen team the result would be 78:72. If the result of the match is 75:80, the player betting slip shall lose because, taking into account the handicap, the result would be favourable to the opposite team, i.e. 78:80. If the match ends up with the result 75:78, the bet

would be equivalent to 1 (one) because, taking into account the handicap, the match would end in a tie, i.e. 78:78. 69.1.2. The “three outcome handicap” shall mean an option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event “three outcome handicap” where after the outcome of the betting event the respective handicap (scores etc.) is added to (if the sign “-“ is indicated, the respective number should be deducted) the final result of the chosen team or participant. If after summing up the result of the betting event with the handicap, the result of the betting event (including the handicap) is beneficial to the chosen team or the participant, the bet shall be deemed to be successful. If, taking into account the handicap, the result is to the benefit of the opposite team or participant, the bet shall be deemed to be lost. If, having evaluated the handicap, the result becomes a tie, the bet for a draw with the chosen handicap shall win. (Example) If in case of a match Arsenal - Liverpool the player chooses the handicap of Arsenal (-1) and if the match ends up with the result 2:0, the player betting slip shall win, since, taking into account the handicap to the benefit of the chosen team the result would be 1:0. If the result of the match is 1:1, the player betting slip shall lose because, taking into account the handicap, the result would be favourable to the opposite team, i.e. 0:1. If the match ends up with the result 2:1, the player betting slip shall lose because, taking into account the handicap, the match would end in a tie, i.e. 1:1. 69.1.3. The “double Asian handicap” shall mean an option where, in case of choosing the option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event “double Asian handicap” where after the outcome of the betting event the respective handicap is added to (if the sign “-“ is indicated, the respective handicap should be deducted) the final result of the chosen team or participant and the stake amount is divided into two equal parts. For example, in case of offering “double Asian handicap” (-1,-1.5) and a bet of EUR 100 for such outcome is placed, it shall be deemed that a bet of EUR 50 is placed for the handicap (-1) and a bet of EUR 50 is placed for the handicap (-1.5). Since “double Asian handicap” is a double offer, the final winning odds may be lower than 1 and the winning amount may be lower than the stake amount. If, after summing up the result of the betting event with the handicap, the result of the betting event (with the handicap) is to the benefit of the chosen team or participant, the bet shall be deemed to be successful. If, taking into account the handicap, the result is to the benefit of the opposite team, the bet shall be deemed to be lost. If, having evaluated the handicap, the result becomes a tie, the bet shall be deemed to be equal to 1 (one). (Example) A bet of EUR 100 for the betting event Arsenal - Chelsea for the “double Asian handicap” (-1,-1.5) of the team Arsenal with the odds 1.8 and the result of the match is 2:1. In such case, a bet of EUR 50 for the handicap of Arsenal (-1) shall be equal to 1, whereas a bet of EUR 50 for the handicap of Arsenal (-1.5) shall be deemed to be lost. A winning of EUR 50 shall be disbursed. 69.2. The “total” shall mean that in case of choosing the option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event “total, the number of goals (scores, seconds etc.) during the betting event that has occurred shall be counted. 69.3. The “Asian total” shall mean that in case of choosing the option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event “Asian total”, the number of goals of the participants during the event shall be counted and the stake amount shall be divided into two equal parts. For example, if the offered “Asian total” is higher than (2, 2.5) and a bet of EUR 100 is placed for such outcome, it shall be deemed that a bet of EUR 50 for “total” shall be higher than (2) and a bet of EUR 50 for the “total” shall be higher than (2.5). If the number of goals during the match is higher than the value of “total”, the bet shall be deemed to be successful, if the number of goals is lower than the value of “total”, the bet shall be deemed to be lost; if the number of goals is equal to the value of “total”, the stake amount shall be deemed to be equal to 1 (one). As “Asian total” is a double offer, the final winning odds must be lower than 1 and the winning amount must be lower than the stake amount. (Example) A bet of EUR 100 for the event Arsenal - Chelsea for the “Asian total” (2, 2.5) with the odds 1.9 and the result of the match is 2:0. In such case, a bet of EUR 50 for the “total” (2) shall be equivalent to 1 and a bet of EUR 50 for “total” (2.5) shall be lost. The winning of EUR 50 shall be disbursed. 69.4. The “individual total” shall be an option where the procedure for guessing the option of interpretation of the outcome of the betting event is the same as in case “total”, but only for one team or a separate participant of the betting event. 69.5. The “advance” shall mean a placing of bet in tournaments where the event consists of several matches and it is offered to guess which team (person) advances to the next stage. 69.6. The “comparison” shall mean a guess that one team (player of the match) will perform better (more effective) than the other one or that one match will be more effective than the other match. 69.7. The “half time/match” shall mean an option where it is offered to guess the outcome of the first part of the match and the end of the match. 69.8 The “will/will not score (or yes/no)” shall mean an option where it is offered to guess if the particular team scores a goal during the respective football, ice hockey, polo or other match in which goals are scores and the time limit within which the first goal or the last goal will be scored with one team chosen or in all matches. It shall be offered to guess for the whole match or for the particular time interval, for example, that the first goal will be scored within the time period from 1 to 30 min. 69.9. The “home/guest (or host or home/road)” shall mean an option where it is offered to guess several betting events that are summed up. The “home” team shall include the teams of a separate championship, tournament that play at home. The “guest” team shall include all teams of a tournament, championship that play outside their state. The “home” team shall be indicated as first in the betting offers and the betting slip. For example, the “handicap” of home/guest scores, the “individual total” of the home/guest teams, “total” of the home/guest teams. 69.10. The “range” shall mean an option where it is offered to guess the result of the betting event which would fall within the range of results indicated in the betting offers. 69.11. The “additional betting event offers” shall mean additional outcomes “total”, “handicaps”, “individual total”, “half time/match” “first match quarter” and other possible options of the outcome of the betting event. X. BETTING THRESHOLDS AND ODDS 70. The main principles of formation of the betting odds shall be as follows: 70.1. The betting odds shall range from 1 to 15,000. In case of a combined bet, the maximum betting odds shall be 7,500. 70.2. The greater the mathematical probability of guessing the outcome of the betting event, the lower the betting odds shall be. The lower the mathematical probability of guessing the outcome of the betting event, the greater the betting odds shall be applicable. 70.3. Lower odds shall be set for the favourite of the event and higher odds shall be set for the outsider of the match. 70.4. The odds shall be increased by reducing the player’s probability of guessing the outcome of the betting event by means of a handicap. The odds shall be reduced by increasing the player’s probability of guessing the outcome of the betting event by means of handicap. 71. The minimum stake amount for the outcome of one single bet or combined betting event and in the same combination of the systemic bet shall be EUR 0.5 (fifty cents). 72. The maximum winning amount for any remote betting shall be EUR 1,000,000 (one million).

73. The maximum stake amount may be separately set for each type of sports, championship or other betting event or each bet separately in the betting offers. 74. If the combination includes the outcomes of the betting events with different maximum amounts, the maximum amount of such bet shall be the lowest maximum stake amount in the chosen combination. 75. By a written decision of the manager of the Company or the employee of the Company authorised by the manager of the Company, the Company shall be entitled to reduce the maximum stake amounts for an individual player. XI. CANCELLATION OF THE BET AND MAIN RULES OF DETERMINING THE OUTCOMES OF THE BET 76. The bets may be cancelled in the cases provided for in the present Section hereof. In the event of cancellation of a bet, the betting odds shall be deemed to be equivalent to 1 and the stake amount shall be repaid to the player. 77. The bet shall be cancelled if the betting event has not occurred. The betting event shall be deemed to have not occurred if it has not actually occurred irrespective of whether it had to occur or did not have to occur. The betting event shall also be deemed to have not occurred if it does not meet the terms and conditions set out in Paragraph 81 hereof. If the time of the betting event indicated in the betting offers differs from the time of the betting event that has actually occurred, the betting event shall be deemed to have not occurred. 78. The bet shall be cancelled if the participant of the betting event for which/whom the bet was placed has not participated in the betting event. The bet shall also be cancelled if the participant has not participated in the betting event despite the fact that his participation was published in the betting offers including the cases where the name, surname, gender (where the participants of the events are men, no reference shall be provided; where the participants of the event are women, the reference “Women” shall be additionally inserted in the betting offers), age group (indicated in case of participation of young athletes or veteran athletes) of the participant(s) of the betting event was not indicated or was incorrectly indicated or the disability of the participants of the betting event was not indicated in the betting offers as a result of a mistake. 79. The bet shall be cancelled in case of a technical winning or loss by reason that at least one of the participants of the event has not participated in the event (for example, the team has failed to be present at the match etc.). 80. The bet shall be cancelled if the betting event operator amends the regulation of the event (for example, changes the duration of the match, the number of players etc.). 81. The bet shall be cancelled if the player has placed his/her bet or the Company has accepted his/her bet after the beginning of the betting event. In case of live betting, the bet shall be cancelled only in case where the player has placed his/her bet or the Company has accepted his/her bet after the outcome of the event is clear (for example, bets for the winner of the first half shall be cancelled if the bets are placed already well after the end of the first half). In all cases, bets shall be cancelled if the player has placed his/her bet or the Company has accepted his/her bet well after the end of the betting event. If the start of the betting event does not coincide with the information published in the official sources of information, the actual start of the event shall be deemed to be the start of the bet. 82. The bet shall be cancelled if the event does not occur within 12 hours from the start time of the event published by the betting event operator, except for the cases where the betting operator indicates the duration of the event which is longer than one day (for example, snooker, cricket) unless the present Regulation provides for otherwise. 83. For convenience of the players, the betting offers shall first (1) indicate the host team, and second (2) the guest team. This shall not constitute grounds for cancellation of the bet unless indicated otherwise. 84. In the event of cancellation of a combined or systemic bet, only the betting odds of the particular betting outcome shall be changed; whereas the betting odds of other outcomes included in the combination shall not be subject to change. 85. In case of bets for sports matches, all betting outcomes shall be set with regard to the regular time of the match, unless the present Regulation provides for otherwise. If the Company offers to place a bet only for two outcomes of the bet (1 – first team, 2 – second team), i.e. the Company does not offer to place a bet for X, i.e. draw, only outcome 1 (first team) and outcome 2 (second team) of the betting event shall be set with regard to the time of the whole match (i.e. the watch time with extensions) and all other outcomes of the betting event shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match (i.e. the match time without extensions), unless the present Regulation provides for otherwise. 86. The betting events shall be deemed to have occurred despite the fact that they have not actually finished if match has already lasted at least: Football – 60 min. Basketball (NBA) – 40 min. European basketball or in case of playing according to the l FIBA and WNBA rules – 35 min. Ice hockey (NHL) – 54 min. European ice hockey – 50 min. American football – 50 min. Baseball – For result purposes: 5 innings, but for the outcomes of the betting event “total” and “handicap” – at least9 innings. Handball – 50 min. 87. Bets for the outcomes “home/guest” shall be accepted for the number of matches indicated in the betting offers. If at one of the matches does not occur, the bet shall be cancelled. 88. In case of bets with the betting outcome “home/guest”, the scores (goals and other results) of the home and guest teams during the match time indicated in the betting offers shall be calculated. Bets with the outcomes “home/guest” shall be accepted only before the start of the first match. 89. The outcome of the betting event “advance” shall be determined according to the final result of the match and only after the end of a series of matches (if any). 90. In pursuance of ensuring fair betting, if the player places a combined bet with the combination of the events determining each other and the Company erroneously accepts such bet, such bet shall be cancelled. 91. If a betting event is terminated and does not occur within 12 hours from the start of the event, the bets for the outcomes of the bet which have not occurred as a result of termination of the event or may be influenced by the continuation of the match shall be cancelled. The bets for the outcomes of the bet that have occurred before termination of the event or are not influenced by the continuation of the match shall be accepted. The provisions of the present paragraph shall not be applicable to the events provided for in Paragraph 81 hereof. 92. If several participants of the betting event or outcomes are published as the winners of the betting event, the winning amount shall be calculated by dividing the betting odds indicated in the betting slip from the number of the successful participants or outcomes. The recalculated betting odds cannot be lower than 1. For example, in case where several participants or outcomes of the betting event are recognised as successful, the first player chooses the outcome “Maze, Tina (SLO) will rank first” in the women alpine skiing downhill category in the Winter Olympic Games with the betting odds 3.4 and places a bet of EUR 10.

Meanwhile, the second player chooses the outcome “Gisin, Dominique (SUI) will rank first” with the betting odds 8 from the betting offers and places of bet of EUR 10. At the end of the competition, Maze, Tina (SLO) and Gisin, Dominique (SUI) are recognised as the winners with the equal results 1:41:57 (distance coverage time) and they are awarded with the Olympic gold medals. As there are two winners, the winnings are disbursed to both players, but 2 times lower odds are applicable: EUR 17 (1.7x10=17) for the first player and EUR 40 (4x10=40) for the second player. XII. OTHER SPECIAL CASES 93. Where the Company is not convinced of reliability of the outcome of the betting event published in the official sources of information, it shall be entitled to defer confirmation of the result up to 3 (three) working days. The Company shall publish this in the betting stations and on its own website. Upon expiry of the period of deferral, the winning shall be disbursed in accordance with the adjusted data available in the official sources of information or, where such adjustments are not available, according to the original data. 94. If the outcome of the betting event (a complaint has been lodged) is contested before publication of the original match record (statistical data published immediately after the match), disbursements of all related winnings shall be deferred to the date of examination of the opposition (complaint). 95. In case of cancellation or change of the result of the betting event (for example, due to disqualification of a team or a player, officiating, amendments to the terms and conditions etc.), the original result that has been published before contesting it shall be deemed to be the valid result of the betting event. 96. If the Company makes a mistake in accepting the bet placed by the player and finds out about such mistake before or after the start of the betting event, the bet shall be cancelled. A mistake of the Company shall be deemed to include (but shall not be limited to) the following cases: (i) setting the betting odds which is obviously erroneous; (ii) a comma is missing; (iii) where due to a technical error in live betting the betting odds in the betting offers are not updated and does not reflect the real course of the match; (iv) the positive sign is reversed with the negative sign; (v) the additional betting event offers do not meet the main offers of the outcomes of the same event (winner, handicap, total etc.); (vi) the odds of the outcome significantly differ from the odds of the same outcome in the offers of other betting companies including, but not limited to the ones offered by Topsport UAB, Orakulas UAB at the moment of acceptance of the bet. The Company shall publish about such cancellation of the bet and the reasons thereof on its website or in the betting stations in which the bets for the cancelled betting event were placed within 5 working days. If the player does not accept the reason of cancellation, he/she must bring a written claim for such cancellation of the bet against the Company within 10 calendar days from the date of cancellation of the bet. Having received such claim from the player, the Company shall be obliged to disburse a winning to the player or refuse to satisfy the player’s claim by providing a detailed well-grounded written explanation supported by the documents within 14 calendar days. If the player does not accept the reasons set out in the explanation, the player shall be entitled to apply to the Control Authority or court for resolution of the arising dispute. XIII. SEPARATE TYPES OF BETS 97. If the provisions concerning operation of a betting event envisaged in the present section hereof are contrary to the general provisions, the betting operation provisions set out in the present section hereof shall prevail. Live Betting 98. In case of live betting, bets on the outcomes of the betting event with the possible option “handicap” may be presented in the following two ways: 98.1. Indicating two possible outcomes: “first participant handicap” and “second participant handicap”. 98.2. Indicating three possible outcomes: “first participant handicap”, “draw with handicap” and “second participant handicap”. If, in case of live betting, two possible outcomes of the betting event are offered and the result of the handicap indicated in the betting offers is achieved, the bet shall be cancelled. If, in case of live betting, three possible outcomes of the betting event are offered and the result of the handicap indicated in the betting offers is achieved, the bet “draw with handicap” shall be deemed to be successful and the bets “first participant handicap”, “second participant handicap” shall be deemed to have lost. Tennis 99. The player who wins the games in a tennis match shall win the set. The player who wins the sets in accordance with the procedure prescribed in the tennis match regulation shall win the match. 100. If one of the players in a tennis match fails to finish the match, the bets for the winner of the match and the bets for the tennis statistics (aces, double faults, pass speed etc.) and the outcomes of the bets that have not occurred before termination of the event or that could be influenced by continuation of the match shall be cancelled. The bets for the tennis statistics (aces, double faults, pass speed etc.) and the outcomes of the bets that have occurred before termination of the event or which are not influenced by continuation of the match shall be accepted. (For example, the tennis match ATP Tour. Masters Series. Rome, ITA (Clay) Nadal, Rafael (ESP) - Federer, Roger (SUI) were terminated when the result was 6:4 1:6 0:3 because Nadal, Rafael (ESP) refused to continue the fight due to a trauma. The bets for the outcomes 1.2, third set winner 2, game total under 24.5, second participant game handicap 2.5 shall be cancelled. The bets for the following outcomes: second set winner 1, game total over 22.5, first participant game handicap -1.5, first participant set handicap 1.5, shall be accepted). 101. If any one of the participants of the betting event has not started playing the scheduled tennis match (for example, due to disqualification, trauma etc.), the bet shall be cancelled. 102. If in the course of the tournament a tennis match is terminated and not finished on the same day and is postponed, the outcome of the match shall be determined when the match is finished in the tournament (except for the cases where the place of the match is changed. In such case, the bet shall be cancelled). In case where in the course of the tournament a tennis match is terminated or not finished on the same day and is postponed and one of the participants refuses to participate in the bet, the bet shall be cancelled. If a tennis match is terminated and not finished on the same day, the Company shall be entitled to offer to place new bets again (the bets that have already been place shall remain valid, except for the cases of cancellation thereof set out in the Regulation) despite the fact that the match has already started, i.e. offer to place bets for the outcome of the bet as a new event indicating the result that was recorded at the moment of termination or early finishing of the match in the betting offers. 103. If one of the participants refuses to take part in the tennis doubles match (i.e. does not appear on the tennis court) or in doubles match one player is substituted by another player, the bet shall be cancelled. 104. In case of any changes in the composition of the teams in the doubles match and the names of the tennis teams are indicated in the betting offers, the bet shall not be cancelled. 105. The bet shall not be influenced by the cover on which the tennis match takes place (even if different cover is indicated in the betting offers). 106. If after an even number of sets in the tennis match the result is a tie and the championship-like “tie- break (10 scores with the final handicap of two scores achieved by one of the tennis players (teams) is plaid in the decisive set to identify the winner”, the results of the decisive set shall be deemed to be equal to the game results. 107. If for any reason the tennis match is postponed for more than 12 hours, all bets shall remain valid till the

end of the match or tournament. Football 108. The time added by the coach shall be included in the regular time of the football match in the bet. 109. Bets with the outcomes “handicap”, “total”, “range” and all additional statistics shall be possible only for the regular time of the football match. 110. If in the course of the match a yellow card is repeatedly issued against the player and after a while a red flag is issued against the player, both yellow and red cards shall be counted. If a red card is not immediately issued, only the yellow card shall be counter. 111. 11-metre penalty kicks after extensions of the match with a view to finding out the winner of the match shall not be considered as 11-metre penalty kicks in the betting event and shall not be counted as the penalty-kicks taken by the player the result that was recorded before the above series of penalty kicks shall be deemed to be the final result of the match. 112. No own goals shall be counted in the betting event, i.e. it shall not be deemed that the player has scored the goal. 113. The cards shown not to the players who at that time are on the football field (for example, managers of the team, coaches, substitute players) shall not be counted. Basketball 114. All outcomes of the betting event in basketball matches shall be set with regard to the total time of the match (including all extensions), except for the cases where the Company offers to place a bet for a draw at the end the regular time of the match with the insertion “regular time” (abbreviation REG) in the betting offers. In case where the Company also offers to place a bet for a draw at the end of the regular time of the match in the betting offers, the main outcomes of the bet (1, X, 2, 1X, 2X, 12) in such match shall be set only with regard to the regular time of the match; all other outcomes of the bet including the outcomes in relation to statistical data shall be set according to the total time of the match. 115. If a technical foul is imposed on the team already before the start of the match (for example, a hoop has been broken, the team has delayed to appear on the court, a fight before the match and a technical foul has been imposed on the team etc.), the outcome of the bet “first score” shall remain applicable. 116. In cases where the game is extended not due to a draw in the basketball match, but because this is required by the regulation of the tournament, the outcomes shall be recorded with regard to the result of the regular time of the match. In such match, bets for statistical indicators shall include the time of extensions. 117. In cases where the basketball match is not extended despite a draw at the end of the regular time (e.g. friendly match), the result at the expiry of the regular time of the match shall be recorded. In such cases, the odds of the bets for the outcomes 1 and 2 (final winner of the match) shall be deemed to be equal to 1. All other outcomes shall remain valid. 118. The result of the second half of the match and the fourth half of the match shall not include the result of the extended time in the betting offers.

119. In case of placing bets for the range of the scores, the outcomes shall be recorded with regard to the result of the regular time of the match. Baseball, American Football 120. In case of placing a bet for baseball, American football, a bet for the total time of the match (i.e. including extensions) shall be accepted. 121. If a baseball match (MLB (Major League Baseball)) does not take place on the date indicated in the betting offers, the bet shall be cancelled. 122. A baseball (MLB) match which shall take place twice (with the same teams) shall be referred to as G1 match (first day match) and G2 match (second day match) in the betting offers and both match shall be subject to the same set start time of the match, i.e. the start time of the first match, namely G1. 123. The starting pitchers shall not be indicated in the betting offers (MLB) any and changes in the starting pitchers shall have no impact on the bets. 124. In case of a draw in the Japanese baseball match, the bet shall be cancelled only for the outcome “Winner”. Formula 1, Auto-Moto Race 125. The winner of the race in the outcome of the bet “winner of the race” shall be the racer who ranks first according to the original classification record published after the race. 126. The place of the racer in the outcome of the bet shall be determined according to the race record. 127. As for the outcome of the race “the best performer”, the racer who ranks higher in the final classification (according to the original record published immediately after the race) shall be deemed to have performed better. If both racers fail to cover the distance, the racer who covers more circuits shall be deemed to have performed better. If both racers fall out in the same circuit, the bet shall be cancelled. 128. In the outcome of the bet “will cover/will not cover the distance” it shall be offered to guess if the racer will cover the distance without falling out the race. A racer shall be deemed to have covered the distance if he/she has been qualified. 129. In the outcome of the bet “quickest circuit” it shall be offered to guess which racer will be the first to cover the circuit. 130. In the outcome of the bet “safety car” it shall be offered to guess if the car limiting the speed in the race appears (not appears). In this case, some racers lose the gained advantage, i.e. if there was a gap of time between one racer and another racer and they catch up with each other and a safety car appears after an incident on the route, they must follow one another without the possibility to overtake till the safety car leaves the race route. Leaving of a safety car shall not have an impact on the bet. In cases where a safety car takes part in the start of the race (for example, due to poor weather conditions) and in case of restart of the race (if the race was suspended), this shall not be deemed to be an appearance of the safety car within the meaning of the present paragraph. 131. If a racer starts in the main race (not qualifying racing), the race shall not be affected by further obstacles (for example, if the racer is involved in an accident, a race car breaks down etc.) due to which the racer cannot continue the race. 132. If Formula 1, auto-moto race is suspended and not restarted within 48 hours, the bet shall be cancelled. Ice Hockey 133. In case where the Company offers to place a bet for the winner of the ice hockey after expiry of the regular time of the match, the winner of the ice hockey match shall be determined with regard to the regular time of the match (60 min.) excluding extensions and a serious penalty kicks (the regular time shall be 60 min. excluding extensions and penalty kicks). 134. In case where the Company offers to place a bet for the winner of the ice hockey match after expiry of the total time of the match in the betting offers, the winner of the ice hockey match shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match including extensions, but excluding a series of penalty kicks (the total match time shall be the regular time including extensions). 135. In case where the Company offers to place a bet for the winner of ice hockey match for the final time of

the match, the winner of the ice hockey match shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match and a series of penalty kicks (the final time of the match shall mean the regular time with extensions and penalty kicks). 136. Bets for the ice hockey matches with the outcomes “handicap” and “total” shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match (60 min.) unless the betting offers indicate otherwise. 137. The outcomes of the bet for the precise score of the match and the last goal of the match or that the teams will score at least one goal in the ice hockey match shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match (60 min.) unless the betting offers indicate otherwise. 138. The outcomes of the bet for statistical data (goals, penalty minutes, goals scored by the players, successful passes, performance) in the ice hockey match shall be established with regard to the regular time of the match (60 min.) unless the betting offers indicate otherwise. Biathlon, Skiing, Ski Jumping and Alpine Skiing

139. It shall be offered to guess which athlete (team) performs better, ranks higher in the final match record. If athletes (teams) fall out of the match at different stages of the competition, the winner shall be deemed to be the athlete (team) that covers more stages of the match. Both athletes (teams) must start the competition. If either athlete fails to start the competition, all related bets shall be deemed to be equivalent to 1. Bets for lotteries SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 and SUPERLOTO 7 of 42 140. If the term does not have a reference to the particular lottery to which it is applicable, the term shall be applicable both to the lottery SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 and the lottery SUPERLOTO 7 of 42. If the term has a reference to the particular lottery to which it is applicable, the term shall be applicable only to the indicated lottery: 140.1. The “gaming machine” shall mean a mechanical device used for placing, mixing of balls and random selection of lucky balls of the run. 140.2. The “balls” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 lottery) shall mean a set of thirty six (36) balls used for the game. The balls shall be blue, white, green and red (9 balls of each colour) and numbered from 1 to 36 (inclusive). The sum of the figures on the balls shall be 666, the sum of white balls shall be 45, the sum of green balls shall be 126, the sum of red balls shall be 207 and the sum of blue balls shall be 288. 140.3. The “balls” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 7 of 42 lottery) shall mean a set of forty two (42) balls used for the game. The balls shall be yellow and black (21 balls of each colour) and numbered from 1 to 42 (inclusive). The sum of the figures of the balls shall be 903, the sum of yellow balls shall be 451, the sum of black balls shall be 452. 140.4. The “box of the gaming machine” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 lottery) shall mean a part of the machine in which the balls are placed and mixed after presentation and where the lucky balls are selected. 140.5. The “drum of the gaming machine” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 7 of 42 lottery) shall mean a part of the gaming machine in which the balls are placed and mixed after presentation and where the lucky balls are selected. 140.6. The “cylinders” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 lottery) shall mean five identical parts connected by the box of the gaming machine where balls are placed and 5 lucky balls of 36 balls are presented at close range (in a separate shot). 140.7. The “chute” (applicable to SUPERLOTO 7 of 42 lottery) shall mean a part connected with the drum of the gaming machine where balls are placed and 7 lucky balls are presented at close range (in a separate shot). 140.8. The “odds” shall mean the number set by the Company which is multiplied by the stake amount of the player to determine the winning. 140.9. The “draw” shall mean one cycle of operation of the gaming machine from the moment of placing the balls in the gaming machine to the moment of random selection of lucky balls. 140.10. The “betting round” shall mean the time during which bets are accepted. 141. In case of bets for lotteries, there shall be one betting round for one draw during which bets for the options in the betting offers for the next draw shall be accepted. Bets shall be accepted not during the betting round. 142. The betting round shall take place during the breaks between draws and shall last for several minutes (after the draw broadcast, the betting round of the next draw shall start and the draw broadcast shall be followed by a betting round). 143. 5 balls of 36 balls available in the gaming machine of the lottery SUPERLOTO 5 of 36 shall at random roll out to the cylinders. The draw shall be deemed to have occurred if exactly 5 balls are selected from the box of the machine; in other cases, the draw shall be deemed to have failed and all bets of such draw shall be repaid. The sequence of lucky balls in the result of the draw shall be recorded according to the five cylinders of the gaming machine in which they get; the result shall be recorded from left to the right (the leftmost cylinder in the shop is the first, whereas the rightmost cylinder shall be the last). The sequence in which the cylinders of the gaming machine are filled in shall have no impact on the result of the draw. 144. 7 balls of 42 shall at random get to the chute from the gaming machine of the lottery SUPERLOTO 7 of 42. The draw shall be deemed to have occurred if at least 7 balls are rolled out of the drum. In other cases, the draw shall be deemed to have failed and all bets of such draw shall be repaid. In cases where more than 7 balls are rolled out of the drum due to a technical error, only the first 7 balls shall be recorded in the results. All balls rolled out from the drum after the seventh ball shall not be included in the result. 145. The winnings of the bets for lotteries shall be established according to the odds indicated by the Company multiplied by the stake amounts placed by the players during the round. The betting odds shall be shown during the whole betting round. 146. Special cases where a draw shall be cancelled and the stake amount shall be repaid to the player shall include the following: 146.1. A ball gets to an invisible place due to the actions of the lottery master during the draw; 146.2. Balls are not prepared till the start of the draw, i.e. balls are not placed in the intended place so that the video material showed that a full and not mixed set of balls is used in the draw; 146.3. The player’s bet has been accepted after the betting round; 146.4. A draw is cancelled by the lottery operator or the enterprise broadcasting online lottery video by communication means due to technical barriers (breakdown of the equipment, actions of third parties etc.); 147. Bets for lotteries may also be cancelled in accordance with the general betting rules. 148. In the event of a failure of sound during the broadcast or a mistake made in publishing the numbers of the rolled out balls by a master, the bet draw results shall be recorded on the basis of the video broadcast.

149. If the player cannot see the video due to the technical barriers (internet connection problems, interruptions to power supply, computer breakdown etc.), but the draw video record is in the archive, such draw shall be deemed to have occurred and shall not constitute grounds for cancellation of the bet. 150. Bets for lotteries shall be operated in a remote manner (remote betting). In the event of operation of bets for lotteries in a remote manner (remote betting), the lotteries shall be broadcasted online in the player’s

equipment (computer or mobile device). 151. A bet placed online shall be deemed to be accepted as of the moment when the Company’s online communication system confirms the bet. XIV. GENERAL REMOTE TABLE GAMING REGULATIONS 152. The provisions of the present Section shall be applicable to all types of remote table games provided for herein unless the particular provision sets forth otherwise. 153. The following remote table games shall be operated on the Company’s website: 1) Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker; 2) Texas Hold’em Poker; 3) Omaha Poker. 154. A remote table game shall be operated by means of a remote gaming device. The card dealing and random sequence of cards shall be ensured by the software certified by an accredited laboratory (random number generator). 155. 1 pack of cards consisting of 52 cards of 4 suits shall be used in a remote table game: hearts, diamonds, spades and clubs. There are 13 cards of each type of cards, i.e. from Two to Ace. 156. The combination of Poker cards shall imply the rank of cards according to the significance of the cards. Each combination of Poker cards shall consist only of five cards. The combinations of Poker cards below shall be set out from the combinations of the lowest rank to the combinations of the highest rank:

“The “High Card” shall mean the highest card where the available cards do not make a combination which is higher than Pair or equal to Pair.

The “Pair” shall mean two cards of one rank (for example, two Kings) and any other three cards

The “Two Pairs” shall mean a combination of two pairs of the cards of one rank (for example, two Queens and two Sevens) and any other card

The “Three of a Kind” shall mean a combination of three cards of one rank (for example, three Fives) and any other two cards

The “Straight” shall mean a sequence of five different cards of any suit (for example, Five, Six, Seven, Eight, Nine)

Ace may be considered as the lowest card or the highest card in a combination. An intermediate straight shall not be possible (for example, Jack, Queen, King, Ace, Two). The “Flush” shall mean a set of five cards of the same suit (for example, Queen of clubs, Nine of clubs, Six of clubs, Four of clubs, Two of clubs)

The “Full House” shall mean a set of three cards of one rank (for example, three Kings) and a Pair (for example, two Tens)

The “Four of a Kind” shall mean a set of four cards of one rank (for example, four Aces) and any other card

The “Straight Flush” shall mean a sequence of five cards of the same suit (for example, Five of hearts, Six of hearts, Seven of hearts, Eight of hearts, Nine of hearts)

Ace shall be considered as the lowest ranking card in the combination. The “Royal Flush” shall mean a sequence of cards of the same suit, i.e. Ace, King, Queen, Jack and Ten

156.1. The cards shall rank from the lowest card as follows: Two, Three, Four, Five, Six, Seven, Eight, Nine, Ten, Jack, Queen, King, and Ace. Ace may be the lowest card and the highest card depending on the combination of cards. 156.2. If several players have combinations of cards of one rank (for example, two Jacks), the winner shall be the one who has a higher kicker. If several players have absolutely the same combination of cards and a kicker, the game shall end in a draw and the pot shall be split. 156.3. If several players have the combination Straight, the winner shall be the one who has a combination of higher rank. If both combinations consist of identical cards, the game shall end in a draw and the pot shall be split. 156.4. If several players have the combination Flush or the combination Straight Flush, Straight flush“), the winner shall be the one who has a combination of higher rank. If both combinations consist of identical cards, the game shall end in a draw and the pot shall be split. 157. The “kicker” shall be the highest card(s) in a set of five cards if several players have the same combinations, except for the one consisting of five cards. 158. The “dealer” shall mean the player marked as “D” participating in the remove table game. The mark shall indicate the card dealing sequence and betting: clockwise starting from the player that is first on the left to the dealer. 159. The “pot” shall mean the amount of all bets of the players participating in the same remote table game. The winner of the pot shall be the player who has the highest combination of five cards. The pot shall not be applicable when playing Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker. 160. The “split pot” shall mean the situation where if no player has an advantage over other players (draw), the pot shall be split in equal parts. If the amount of the pot cannot be split in equal parts, the greater part shall belong to the first player on the left to the dealer. 161. The “side pot” shall mean the pot where three or more players participating in the game risk all their chips (all-in). If one player has less chips than other players participating in the game, such player may win only such amount of chips of each player he had at the start of card dealing. Other players (who had more chips) shall further compete for the side pot.

For example, player A makes a bet of EUR 10, player B makes a bet of EUR 15, player C makes a bet of EUR 20. After all, the pot is won by player A and the side pot is won by player B. Player A make a bet of EUR 10 and may win from each player only such amount of chips he risked, i.e. in total EUR 30. Player B wins from player C only the amount of chips which has remained after disbursement of the winning to player A, i.e. EUR 5. Player C has lost EUR 10 to player A and EUR 5 to player B. 162. The “prize pool” shall be the amount of all buy-ins made by all players participating in the same remote table game tournament.

163. The “buy-in” shall mean the amount of virtual gaming cash chips bought in by the player willing to participate in a remote table game from his player betting account and which is indicated at each remote game table. 164. The “rake” shall mean a part of the buy-in or pot going to the Company. 164.1. The amount of the rake shall be set by a separate order of the general manager of the Company or the authorised person thereof and shall be published on the website of the Company. 164.2. In case of using virtual cash chips for the game, the rake shall be calculated only from the winning of the player. The final amount of the rake for participation in the operated game shall be calculated at the end of one game run. 164.3. In case of tournaments, the rake shall be included in the amount of the buy-in or additional buy-in made by the player and the amount of the rake shall be indicated in the information display at each game table. 164.4. In the event of any changes in the structure of the rake, the players shall be notified by a separate notice. The structure of the rake of the game that has already started shall not be subject to changes. 165. The “virtual gaming cash chip” shall mean the chip the value of which shall be indicated on the chip in EUR. Chips of different value shall differ in colour or bear the value in digits. 166. The “virtual tournament chip” shall mean the chip without monetary value and used in tournaments. Each player participating in the tournament shall make the same buy-in to the tournament and received the amount of tournament chips indicated in the tournament terms and conditions (in case of Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker, points). 167. The “hand” shall mean a part of the game consisting of card dealing, four betting rounds, opening of the community cards and the pot winning. 168. The “community cards” shall mean the cards opened on the table by the random number generator with which the players participating in the game make their combinations of cards. The first three community cards (Flop) shall be opened after all players participating in the game receive two cards and the first betting round is finished. Opening of the Flop cards shall be followed by the second betting round. The fourth community card (Turn) shall be opened at the end of the second betting round. Opening of the Turn card shall be followed by the third betting round. The fifth community card (River) shall be opened at the end of the third betting round. Opening of the River card shall be followed by the fourth betting round. 169. The “betting round” shall mean a betting stage during which all players participating in the game make their bets clockwise (starting from the player on the left to the dealer). If the player presses the button “Fold”, i.e. withdraws from the hand, the player’s cards shall be collected and the combination of the collected cards shall not be shown to other players. A new betting round shall start after the changes in the course of betting, i.e. before/after opening the community cards. 170. The blinds shall be as follows: The “small blind” shall mean a blind of the established amount made by the first player on the left to the dealer. The small blind shall not be applicable in case playing the Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker. The “big blind” shall be a blind of the established amount made by the first player on the left to the player who made the small blind. The big blind shall not be applicable in case playing the Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker.

171. The “straddle” shall mean a voluntary bet equal to double big blind that may be made only by the player on the left to the player who made the big blind. The straddle shall not be applicable in case playing the Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker. 172. The “ante” shall mean an additional blind of the established amount made before the card dealing. This bet must be made by all players participating in the game. This bet shall be applicable only to specially marked games (game tables) and tournaments. 173. The “all-in” shall mean a bet by the player where the player bets all his chips and does not participate in further betting rounds of the game. 174. The “muck” shall mean the possibility not to show own combination of Poker cards to other players before/after the split bank provided to the player. 175. The “run it twice” cards (additional community cards) shall mean a possibility for two players to compete for the pot winning twice in Texas Hold’em Poker and Omaha Poker by opening additional community Flop, Turn and River cards and enabling the players to have two combinations of cards in the course of one hand. 175.1. Opening of run it twice cards shall be possible only subject to the following conditions: 1) one of the players has made an “all-in” bet; 2) the second player has called to the player’s all-in bet; 3) all players remaining in the game shall accept opening of run it twice cards. 175.2. The following three versions of opening the run it twice cards shall be possible: a) Before opening of Flop community cards. Upon fulfilment of the conditions of run it twice cards before opening of Flop community cards, in total 10 (ten) cards shall be opened on the table, i.e. 3 Flop community cards and 3 Flop run it twice cards, 1 Turn community card and 1 Turn run it twice card and 1 River community card and 1 River run it twice card shall be opened. b) Before opening of a Turn community card. Upon fulfilment of the conditions of run it twice cards before opening of a Turn community card, in total 7 (seven) cards shall be opened on the table, i.e. 3 Flop community cards, 1 Turn community card and 1 Turn run it twice card and 1 River community card and 1 River run it twice card shall be opened. c) Before opening of a River community card. Upon fulfilment of the conditions of run it twice cards before opening of a River community card, in total 6 cards shall be opened on the table, i.e. 3 Flop community cards, 1 Turn community card and 1 River community card and 1 River run it twice card shall be opened. 175.3. Having taken the opportunity of run it twice cards, the winners of the hand shall be determined in accordance with the following procedure: a) The first half of the amount available in the pot shall be won by the player having a higher ranking combination of Poker community cards. b) The second half of the amount available in the pot shall be won by the player having a higher ranking combination of Poker run it twice cards. c) In the event of a failure to determine the winner, i.e. where both players have the same combinations of cards, the pot shall be split. 175.4. The run it twice possibility shall not be binding and shall be applicable only to the specially marked games (game tables). Example of run it twice. Suppose that player A and player B fulfil the conditions of run it twice cards provided for in Paragraph 175.1. hereof before opening of Turn community cards. The cards dealt to player A are Ace and Jack. The cards dealt to player B are King and Queen.3 Flop community cards (Jack, Ten and Five) are opened, 1 Turn community card (Four) is opened, 1 Turn run it twice card (Queen) is opened, 1 River community card (Seven) is opened and 1 River run it twice (Nine) is opened.

The first half of the amount in the pot is won by player A, since his combination of community cards make Pair combination: two Jacks, Ace, Ten and Seven. Meanwhile, the combination of community cards of player B is High Card: King, Queen, Jack, Ten and Seven.

The second half of the amount in the pot is won by player B, since his combination of run it twice cards is Straight: King, Queen, Jack, Ten, Nine. Meanwhile, the combination of run it twice cards of player A is Pair: two Jacks, Ace, Queen, Ten. 176. Policy of communication failures and disconnections: 176.1. The Company shall not be held liable for any technical and communication malfunctions of the player’s equipment. 176.2. In the event of any malfunctions referred to in Paragraphs 176.1 hereof, the Company shall give 60 seconds for the player to connect to the Company’s computer network and continue the started games. If the player fails to connect to the Company’s computer network within the time limit given for him, he shall lose the paid in amount for the game (buy-in). 176.3. If the malfunctions occur as a result of malfunctions in the Company’s computer network, the made bets shall be cancelled and all amounts paid in by the players shall be returned to their player betting account. 177. Unethical gaming policy: 177.1. All remote table games shall not be team games. Any actions including, but not limited to participation in conversation rooms with a view to help to another player to win, thus, gaining an advantage over other players shall be prohibited. 177.2. Disclosure of cards or intentional loss shall be deemed to be swindling. 177.3. Should the Company have reasonable suspicions that the player swindles, it shall carry out the actions provided for in Paragraphs 30-32 and 13 hereof. 178. Unauthorised actions and applications: 178.1. Agreement. Any agreement between the players where cards and/or a combination thereof are disclosed which results in an advantage over other players shall be prohibited. 178.2. External auxiliary systems. Applications of any type aimed at gaining an unfair advantage over other players shall be prohibited in the remote table games operated by the Company. 178.3. Bots. Any use of artificial intelligence including, but not limited to “robots” shall be strictly prohibited. All actions of the player related to remote table games operated by the Company shall be carried out by the player himself using the player account. 178.4. Chip dumping. Dumping of cash and/or cash chips to the opponent with a view to cashing out any unlawfully received income shall be prohibited. 178.5. If the Company has reasonable suspicions that the player swindles, it shall carry out the actions provided for in Paragraphs 30-32 and 13 hereof. XV. SEPARATE TYPES OF REMOTE TABLE GAMES 179. If the provisions concerning operation of remote table games are in conflict with the provisions of the general part, the special provisions concerning operation of remote table games set forth herein shall apply. Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker 180. The “Open Face Chinese (OFC) Poker” shall mean a remote table game of 13 (thirteen) cards allowing a simultaneous game of 2-4 players, played in sets and including three rows of cards (top (3 cards), middle (5 cards) and bottom (5 cards)). The same combinations of Poker cards as set out in Paragraph 156 hereof above shall be used in the game. In case of the OFC poker, at the moment of hand, the cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows and the gaming rules depends on the type of the chosen game type of the OFC poker: 180.1. Classic OFC poker game. 5 (five) cards shall be outright dealt to each player and later on each player shall receive 1 (one) card in turn until the player will have received 13 (thirteen) cards. The cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows: the bottom row shall be of higher rank than the middle row and the middle row shall be of higher rank than the top row.

180.2. OFC Pineapple poker game. 5 (five) cards shall be outright dealt to each player and later on each player shall receive 3 (three) cards in turn by discarding 1 (one) card until the player will have received 13 (thirteen) cards. The cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows: the bottom row shall be of higher rank than the middle row and the middle row shall be of higher rank than the top row. 180.3. OFC Pineapple 2-7 poker game. 5 (five) cards shall be outright dealt to each player and then each player shall receive 3 (three) cards in four times by discarding 1 (one) card each time. The cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows: the bottom row shall rank higher than the top row and the top row shall rank higher than the middle row, the middle row cannot rank higher than the combination “High Card – 10”. 180.4. Progressive OFC Pineapple poker game. 5 (five) cards shall be outright dealt to each player and later on each player shall receive 3 (three) cards in turn by discarding 1 (one) card until the player will have received 13 (thirteen) cards. The cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows: the bottom row shall be of higher rank than the middle row and the middle row shall be of higher rank than the top row. 180.5. OFC Turbo poker game. Progressive OFC Pineapple poker game. 5 (five) cards shall be outright dealt to each player and later on each player shall receive 4 (four) cards in turn until each player will have received 13 (thirteen) cards. The cards shall be arranged on the basis of the principle of three rows: the bottom row shall be of higher rank than the middle row and the middle row shall be of higher rank than the top row. 181. The “fantasy land” shall be such card dealing where 14 and more cards are received together and the player may arrange them in Open Face Chinese poker rows in one move. The selective requirements for the hand “fantasy land” shall be as follows: 181.1. In case of Classic, Pineapple and Turbo OFC poker games, Pairs of Queens or a higher combination shall be put in the top row. During next hand the player shall outright receive 14 cards and may stack them in one move. 181.2. In case of 2-7 Pineapple OFC poker game, Pairs of Kings or a higher combination shall be placed in the top row and/or a combination of cards 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 shall be placed in the middle row. In case of making the combination of a Pair of Kings or a combination of higher rank in the top row and a combination of cards 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 in the middle row, during the next hand the player shall receive 14 cards. In case of making both afore-mentioned combinations at the same time, during the next hand the player shall receive 15 cards. 181.3. In case of Progressive OFC Pineapple poker game, the number of cards received during next hand shall depend on the ranking of the combination made in the top row: 181.3.1. In case of a Pair of Queens, 14 cards shall be received. 181.3.2. In case of a Pair of Kings, 15 cards shall be received. 181.3.3. In case of a Pair of Aces, 16 cards shall be received. 181.3.4. In case of any Three of the Kind, 17 cards shall be received.

182. The “invalid hand” shall mean the result of a set or hand of the OFC poker game where the player fails to comply with the rules set out in Paragraph 180 hereof. The invalid hand shall mean that, subject to such result, no other proper combination of the game participates in the game during the same hand and the player shall not receive any points. In case of an invalid hand, the player shall lose minimum 6 points and royalties to each player participating in the game if other players have the combinations set out in Paragraph 85 herein below. 183. The minimum and maximum bet shall be set for each gaming table; afore-mentioned information shall be specified in the information table at each gaming table and displayed by visual means. 184. Points. One point for a combination of Poker cards which shall rank higher than the combination of the other player shall be given to the player in the course of the game. If one player makes Poker combinations higher than the combinations of other players in all three rows, he shall additionally receive 3 points. 185. The “royalties” shall mean the points given to the player for the respective combination of Poker cards made in one row in the course of the game. Row Combination Royalties

Straight +2

Flush +4

Full House +6 Bottom row Four of a Kind +10

Straight Flush +15

Royal Flush +25

Three of a kind +2

Straight +4

Flush +8

Middle row Full House +12

Four of a Kind +20

Straight Flush +30

Royal Flush +50

Pair 6 and 6 +1

Pair 7 and 7 +2

Pair 8 and 8 +3

Pair 9 and 9 +4 Top row Pair 10 and 10 +5

Pair Jack and Jack +6

Pair Queen and Queen +7

Pair King and King +8

Pair Ace and Ace +9

Three of a Kind 2, 2 and 2 +10

Three of a Kind 3, 3 and 3 +11

Three of a Kind 4, 4 and 4 +12

Three of a Kind 5, 5 and 5 +13

Three of a Kind 6, 6 and 6 +14

Three of a Kind 7, 7 and 7 +15

Three of a Kind 8, 8 and 8 +16

Three of a Kind 9, 9 and 9 +17

Three of a Kind 10, 10 and10 +18

Three of a Kind Jack, Jack and Jack +19

Three of a Kind Queen, Queen and Queen +20

Three of a Kind King, King and King +21

Three of a Kind Ace, Ace and Ace +22

High Card 9 +1

Middle row (only High Card 8 +2 for Pineapple 2- High Card 7 +4 7 game) Combination 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7 +8

Point calculation example. If a player chooses a remote gaming table with the set stake amount of EUR 1, this means that 1 won point of the player is equal to EUR 1. The player shall receive 1 point for each row won in each hand.

If the player wins against his opponent in all three rows, the successful player shall additionally receive 3 points and 3 points shall be additionally taken from the losing player. Suppose that player A has a High Card Ace in the top row, a Pair of Kings in the middle row and Two Pairs in the bottom row. Player B has a High Card Queen in the top row, a High Card King in the middle row and a Pair in the bottom row. In such case, the result of the hand shall be as follows: player A wins in the top row and receives 1 point, player A wins in the middle row and receives 1 point and player A wins in the bottom row and receives 1 point. In this case, player A wins the hand, gets 3 points and wins EUR 3. Player B loses the hand, loses 3 points and EUR 3. As player 3 wins against player B in all three lines, 3 additional points shall be given to him. Thus, player A won 6 points and player B lost 6 points in this hand. Texas Hold’em Poker 186. The “Texas Hold’em” shall mean a card game classified as remote table game aimed at making the best five-card hand of seven cards available (two “own” cards and five community cards) which would rank

higher than the card-hands of other players. The Texas Hold’em shall be played with no-limit, i.e. the player may raise his bet by an unlimited amount. 187. Two players on the left to the dealer shall make their bets before dealing of cards by the random number generator. The first player shall make a small blind, the second player shall make a big blind. Should the terms and conditions of the game provide for ante bets, all players shall make such ante bets before the small blind and the big blind. 188. The players shall be notified of the amounts of the small blind, the big blind and the ante by visual means in the information display of each gaming table. 189. After making of blinds (small blind and big blind), two cards shall be dealt to each player. 190. The player on the left to the player who has made the big blind shall start the first betting round and may make one of the following actions: 190.1. Call, i.e. make a bet equal to the big blind; 190.2. Raise, i.e. make a bet higher than the big blind; 190.3. Straddle, i.e. make a bet equal to double big blind; 190.4. Check, i.e. skip a bet. Only the player who has made the big bling has such possibility in the first betting round; 190.5. Fold, i.e. place the cards face down on the table and not to participate in the game hand. 191. Other players may carry out one of the following actions: 191.1. Call, i.e. make a bet equal to the bet made by another player; 191.2. Bet, i.e. make a bet equal to or higher than the big blind; 191.3. Raise, i.e. make a bet higher than the previous bet made by another player; 191.3. Check, i.e. skip a bet; 191.4. Fold, i.e. place the cards face down on the table and not to participate in the game hand. The first betting round shall end if the bets made by the players continuing the game are equal in rank. 192. The random number generator shall open three Flops in the middle of the gaming table. The said cards may be used by all players to make their card combinations. Opening of the flop cards shall be followed by the second betting round which, just like the remaining betting rounds, shall start from the player who has made the small blind and the players may carry out one of the actions referred to in Paragraph 191 hereof. 193. At the end of the second betting round, the Turn card shall be opened. The third betting round shall start. Finally, the River card shall be opened and the last (fourth) betting round shall start.

194. After opening of the Flop and Turn cards, the players may take the possibility of opening the run it twice cards. 195. After bets are finished, the cards of the remaining players shall be opened. The pot shall be won by the player having the highest combination of 5 (five) cards. In case of a draw, the pot shall be split. Omaha Poker 196. The “Omaha Poker” shall mean a card game classified as a remote table game aimed at making the highest five-card hand. Omaha Poker shall be subject to the same game rules and course as to Texas Hold’em poker, but unlike in Texas Hold’em, not four cards, but two cards shall be dealt to the players. When making his combination of hands, the player may use only two “own” cards and three community cards. 197. Omaha Poker maybe played in two ways: pot-limit and no-limit. In case of a pot-limit Omaha Poker, the player may raise by the amount not higher than the amount of the pot. In case of no-limit Omaha Poker, the player may raise by an unlimited amount. XVI. REMOTE TABLE GAME TOURNAMENTS (RULES APPLICABLE TO TOURNAMENTS OF ALL TYPES OF POKER) 198. The general rules of tournaments shall be as follows 198.1. The Company shall be entitled to operate tournaments of all types of remove poker games referred to in Paragraph 199 hereof. 198.2. The Company shall reserve the right to postpone or cancel an operated tournament. In case of cancellation, all buy-ins to the tournament shall be repaid to the players. 198.3. All information on the particular tournament shall be provided in the information display at each gaming table: structure of points, amount of the buy-in, date and time of the start of the tournament, amount of the rake, breaks. 198.4. The chairs (positions) at the remote gaming table shall be set at the start of the tournament by means of the random number generator. 198.5. The rules laid down in the information display at each gaming table may state that the tournament allows unregistration until it starts. 198.6. The “re-entry” shall mean a possibility for the player to return to the tournament after drop out of the tournament. The Company may allow re-entries by giving a prior notice in the terms and conditions of the particular tournament and the information display at each gaming table. After the tournaments start, the rules shall not be subject to changes. 198.7. The “re-buy” shall mean a possibility for the player to additionally purchase cash tournament chips. The Company shall be entitled to allow re-buys by giving a prior notice in the terms and conditions of the particular tournament and the information display at each gaming table. 199. The types of tournaments shall be as follows: 199.1. The “Sit & Go” tournament shall mean a tournament with the established number of players participating in it and without the time of the tournament set in advance. The tournaments shall start when the number of players is maximum and shall take place on a continuous basis (i.e. at the end of one Sit & Go tournament, the next tournament shall start immediately after achieving the maximum number of unregistered players). 199.2. The “multi table tournament” or “MTT” shall mean a tournament with the time of the start known in advance and, as a rule, shall have no maximum number of players. 199.2.1. Entries to a MTT tournament that has already started shall be possible unless the terms and conditions of the tournament provide for otherwise. 199.2.2. A player may participate in one MTT tournament only once unless the terms and conditions of the particular tournament provide for otherwise. 199.2.3. Satellite MTT tournaments in which players compete for further access to next satellite tournaments shall not allow unregistration.

199.3. The “freezeout” tournament shall mean a tournament in which all players start the game with the same number of chips and re-buys are not allowed. The tournament shall be continued as long as one of the players wins all chips of other players. 199.4. The “satellite” tournament shall mean a tournament in which all players may win the right to participated in a multi table tournament. 199.5. The “guaranteed prize pool tournament” shall mean a tournament in which the Company guarantees the prize pool indicated in the terms and conditions of the tournament.

199.6. The “freeroll tournament” shall mean a tournament where no advance buy-in is required. Nevertheless, according to the terms and conditions of such tournament indicated in the information display of the gaming table, players may purchase a different number of additional tournament chips (re-buy) in the course of the game. 199.7. The “knockout tournament” shall mean a tournament in which a winning is awarded to the player who knocks out his direct opponent from further game according to the tournament rules established in advance. 199.8. The “progressive knockout tournament” shall mean a tournament in which the amount that maybe received by the player if he knocks out his opponent from the tournament increases every time where this opponent knocks out another player from the tournament (for example, 3 players, i.e. players A, B and C, continue in the tournament. Player A has already knocked out two players from the tournament. Player B has knocked out one player from the tournament. Player C would receive a greater winning for knockout of player A from the tournament than for knockout of player B. The winnings shall be disbursed from the prize pool of the tournament. 199.9. The “bounty tournament” shall mean a tournament in which the Company awards bounty winnings indicated in the information display at each gaming table from the prize pool of the tournament to the players participating in the tournament. Such bounty winnings shall be awarded if all actions carried out in the terms and conditions of the tournament are carried out (for example, if the respective player is knocked out from the tournament). 199.10. The “private tournament” shall mean a tournament operated according to the special promotion published by the Company. A player may enter private tournaments only if he uses a special discount code and knows the tournament password. XVII. THRESHOLDS OF REMOTE TABLE GAMES 200. The minimum stake amount in a remote table game shall be EUR 0.01 (one cent). 201. The maximum stake amount in a remote table game shall be EUR 15,000 (fifty thousand). 202. The maximum winning amount in one remote table game shall be EUR 135,000 (one hundred thirty five thousand). XVIII. DISBURSEMENT OF LOTTERY WINNINGS 203. The players shall win if they correctly guess the outcome of the remote betting in accordance with the procedure prescribed herein or if they win in a remote table game. 204. The winnings for the outcome correctly guessed in a remote manner shall be transferred to the player betting account not later than within 5 days from the date of publication of the result of the betting event in the official sources of information, such results have not been contested and the Company has confirmed this. If the betting results are published not on a public holiday, the winnings shall be disbursed as of the first working day following such public holiday. 205. The winnings gained in the remote table games operated on the Company’s website shall be immediately transferred to the player betting account. 206. The player may at any time transfer money from his/her own player betting account to the player payment account from which, following Paragraph 23 hereof, he/she credited his/her player betting account or to any other player payment account belonging to him/her and indicated in the remote gaming contract. In order to do this, the player must log in to his/her player betting account and, following the visual directions, choose the amount which would be transferred to the chosen player payment account as a winning. 207. The Company shall be entitled to reimburse its actual costs in relation to the fees in relation to money transfers from the player betting account to the player payment accounts charged by commercial banks or other financial institutions. The costs shall be reimbursed by deducting the compensated amount from the amount of money transferred by the player. The amount of compensations charged for money transfers shall be indicated on the Company’s website, in the player betting account and the remote betting contract. 208. At the request of the player, the Company shall be obliged to issue a certificate of the income received by him/her in the form approved by the State Tax Inspectorate. A player shall be entitled to submit such request to the Company by sending it to the e-mail address [email protected], at the address of the registered office of the Company or by filling in an application at the Company’s betting station.

209. The winning or stake amount shall be deemed to be confidential information that must be stored by the Company and may be disclosed only under the procedure and within the terms and conditions prescribed in the laws of the Republic of Lithuania. 210. The Company shall be obliged to store information on the winnings or stake amounts for the period prescribed in the law and must provide such information to public authorities in accordance with the procedure prescribed in the law. XIX. PROCEDURE FOR BRINGING AND HANDLING OF CLAIMS 211. All claims for remote betting and/or related issues shall be brought by the player to the Customer Service Division of the Company by sending the claim to the e-mail [email protected] or by registered mail to the address of the registered office of the Company not later than within 30 calendar days from the day on which the player finds out or should have found out of possible infringement of his/her right. The claim shall state the player’s name, surname, address of the place of residence, contact telephone, e-mail. If a claim is brought by an authorised person, a document evidencing the right of representation shall be provided. 212. The Company shall be obliged to send a detailed reasoned written explanation supported by documents to the player not later than within 14 calendar days from the date of receipt of the claim by the e-mail address or correspondence address indicated by the player. 213. The Company shall not assume liability for the actions or omission of action of the operators providing communication services used for communication of information. 214. The player shall be entitled to apply to the Control Authority or other authorities for the actions or omission of action under the procedure prescribed in the law. XX. FINAL PROVISIONS 215. All disputes arising between the Company and the players which are not resolved under the procedure prescribed herein shall be resolved in accordance with the procedure provided for in the laws of the Republic of Lithuania. 216. The Company shall be entitled to amend the present Regulation under the procedure prescribed in the legal acts of the Republic of Lithuania. 217. The present Regulation shall be binding upon the Company, betting intermediaries and other persons participating in the remote gaming operated on the website of the Company.

ANNEX NO. 1 TO REMOTE GAMING REGULATIONS OF LOŠIMŲ STRATEGINĖ GRUPĖ, UAB I. GENERAL PROVISIONS OF REMOTE GAMING WITH CATEGORY A SLOT MACHINES

1. The provisions of this section shall be applicable to all remote gaming with category A slot machines indicated in the annex to the Remote Gaming Regulations (hereinafter – the Regulations), unless a specific

provision provides otherwise. 2. The Company is the operator of the following remote category A slot machine games: 2.1. Blackjack Pro Montecarlo Single Hand; 2.2. Cash Stampede; 2.3. Double Play SuperBet“; 2.4. Foxin Wins; 2.5. Gorilla Go Wild; 2.6. Irish Eyes 2; 2.7. Medusa 2; 2.8. Miss Midas; 2.9. Owl Eyes; 2.10. Spin Sorceress; 2.11. Starmania; 2.12. Merlin‘s Millions SuperBet; 2.13. Mad Mad Monkey; 2.14. Roulette Master; 2.15. A Dragon Story; 2.16. Medusa; 2.17. Volcano Eruption; 2.18. Witch Pickings; 2.19. Jackpot Jester 50000; 2.20. Jackpot Jester Wild Nudge; 2.21. An Evening with Holly Madison; 2.22. Bingo billions; 2.23. James Dean; 2.24. Giant Gems; 2.25. Foxin‘ wins again; 2.26. Jack‘s beanstalk; 2.27. Titan storm;

2.28. Judge Dredd; 2.29. Wolfpack pays; 2.30. Psycho; 2.31. Robin Hood Prince of Tweets; 2.32. The Spin Lab; 2.33. Casinomeister; 2.34. 1Can 2 Can; 2.35. 300 Shields; 2.36. Doctor Love; 2.37. Doctor Love on Vacation; 2.38. Eastern Dragon; 2.39. The Snake Charmer; 2.40. Genie Wild; 2.41. Gold Ahoy; 2.42. Irish eyes; 2.43. Ramesses Riches; 2.44. Emperor‘s Garden; 2.45. Call of the Colosseum; 2.46. Dragon Drop; 2.47. Wild West; 2.48. Extra cash; 2.49. A While on The Nile; 2.50. Joker Jester; 2.51. Merlin‘s Magic Respins. 3. Remote gaming with category A slot machines shall be organised by the use of remote gaming equipment. Software certified by an accredited laboratory (a random number generator) shall ensure random results. 4. Remote gaming category A slot machines shall be controlled by pushing the respective buttons in accordance with visual means. 5. The minimum and the maximum bet is provided for each remote gaming category A slot machine, and the respective information is presented in the informative table on each slot machine. 6. The maximum amount of winning in any remote game with category A slot machines shall be EUR 25,000 (twenty-five thousand euros). 7. The General Conditions for Application of Discounts (Clauses 33-43 of the Regulation) shall be applicable to remote gaming with category A slot machines.

8. The Company shall not be held liable for any technical and communication malfunctions of the player’s equipment. If the malfunctions occur due to the Company’s fault, the bets made shall be cancelled and all stake amounts shall be repaid to their Betting accounts. II. SEPARATE RULES FOR REMOTE GAMIG WITH CATEGORY A SLOT MACHINES

Blackjack Pro Montecarlo Single Hand 1. Blackjack Pro Montecarlo Single Hand is a game, the aim of which is to achieve a hand that is worth more than the dealer's hand, without busting by breaking a total of 21. 1.1. Chips of a certain value are used in the game with monetary denomination in euros indicated on each of them. The minimum bet is EUR 0.02 EUR (two euro cents), the maximum – EUR 10,000 (ten thousand euros). The rules for calculating the winning are indicated in Clause of 1.10 of this Annex Table of Winnings. 1.2. In order to make a bet, before the generator of random numbers divides the cards, the player must bet by the button “Bet here” and to confirm the bet by the button “Deal”. 1.3. When the bet is confirmed two cards are dealt for the player, and one – for the dealer, and the total hand amount is displayed visually. 1.4. After dealing the cards, the player may carry out one of the following actions: 1.4.1. If both cards dealt are of the same value, the player may choose one split (i. e., to split them into two games once). 1.4.1.1. If splitting is chosen, the player makes a bet equal to his/her first bet (i. e, doubles his/her original bet). If splitting is chosen, the maximum number of points the player may collect is 21. If the sum of the points of his/her two first cards is 21, the player may not collect Blackjack in separate games. 1.4.1.2. In the games split, the player may carry out the same actions as indicated in Clauses 1.4.4. and 1.4.5. The rules for determining the winning remain unchanged.

1.4.2.1. The player may choose Double Down (i. e., to double the stake amount) if the sum of points of the first two cards dealt is 9, 10 or 11. If Double Down is chosen, the player may not receive more than 1 (one) card. The rules of the game and the ones for determining the winning remain unchanged. 1.4.3. If the first card that has fallen for the dealer is the ace, the player may insure his/her bet with an additional amount. The bet made shall be insured by a half of the amount of the player’s stake amount. 1.4.3.1. If the dealer collects Blackjack (e. G., ace and ten), the player’s insured stake amount wins. 1.4.3.2. If the dealer does not collect Blackjack, the player loses his/her insured amount. 1.4.3.3. The rules for determining the winning of the bets made remain unchanged. 1.4.4. To surrender– to participate in the game only with cards opened and indicated amount of points. 1.4.5. To continue – to get an additional card the number of point of which will be added to the previously collected number of points. 1.5. The player may continue the actions listed in Clauses 1.4.4. and 1.4.5. Until the number of points collected satisfies him/her. 1.6. The player or dealer will lose the deal if they collect more than 21 point (“Bust”). 1.7. The result of the game shall be determined by comparing the dealer’s and player’s hand total. 1.7.1. If the player’s hand total is worth more than the dealer’s, not exceeding 21, the player wins the deal. 1.7.2. If the player and the dealer have the same hand total (“Push”), a draw is announced and the bet is returned to the player. 1.7.3. If the player has collected less points than the dealer, the bet is lost.

1.7.4. The player wins if the sum of points of the first two cards dealt to him/her is 21 (e, g., ace and ten). This way the player collects the winning combination of cards – Blackjack. 1.8. 6 (six) decks of cards are used in the game. 1.9. The card decks are shuffled using the generator of random numbers before the start of each game. 1.10. Table of winnings: Result of the game Calculation of winning The player has collected Blackjack Bet + Bet x 1,5 The player has collected more points than the Dealer Bet + Bet x 1 Insurance, if the Dealer has collected Blackjack Insurance amount x 2 Cash Stampede 2. Cash Stampede is a game 243 ways to win and 5 reels the object of which is to collect a winning combination. The winning combinations are indicated in the informative table of the game. 2.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Bonus and Scatter Cash Stampede for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 2.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 2.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. In the game, 25 Coins are always used. The value of 1 (one) Coin is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). 2.3.1. The final bet amount is calculated by multiplying the number of Coins by the bet and is displayed in the field Total bet: Bet Coins Total Bet €0.01 25 €0.25 €0.02 50 €0.50 €0.05 125 €1.25 €0.10 250 €2.50 €0.20 500 €5.00 €0.25 625 €6.25 €0.50 1250 €12.50 €1.00 2500 €25.00 €2.00 5000 €50.00

2.4. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

5x symbol Horse Bet x 100 4x symbol Horse Bet x 25 3x symbol Horse Bet x 10 5x symbol Bison Bet x 100 4x symbol Bison Bet x 25 3x symbol Bison Bet x 10 5X symbol Elephant Bet x 100 4X symbol Elephant Bet x 25 3X symbol Elephant Bet x 10 5x symbol Rhino Bet x 100 4x symbol Rhino Bet x 25 3x symbol Rhino Bet x 10 5x symbol Antelope Bet x 100 4x symbol Antelope Bet x 25 3x symbol Antelope Bet x 10 5x symbol A Bet x 50 4x symbol A Bet x 10 3x symbol A Bet x 5 5x symbol K Bet x 50 4x symbol K Bet x 10 3x symbol K Bet x 5 5x symbol Q Bet x 50 4x symbol Q Bet x 10 3x symbol Q Bet x 5 5x symbol J Bet x 50 4x symbol J Bet x 10 3x symbol J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 Bet x 10

3x symbol 10 Bet x 5 3x symbol Scatter Cash 8 additional spins. Stampede

Bet x 50 and 8 additional spins. During the additional spins, Wild Cash Stampede appears and is kept in 3x symbol Scatter Bonus the middle position of the third reel until the additional spins are used up. Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Bonus and Scatter Cash Stampede, and helps the player to Symbol Wild Cash Stampede make one or several above-mentioned combinations. The symbol Wild Cash Stampede may appear only in the third reel. Bet x 10 and 5 additional re-spins. During additional re-spins, the previously won combination is retained, 2X symbol of any animal and and the player is provided with an opportunity to symbol Wild Cash Stampede increase his/her winning if his/her winning combination is supplemented by additional symbols during a re-spin.

2.4.1. The symbol Scatter Bonus and the symbol Scatter Cash Stampede may appear only in the second, third and fourth reel. 2.5. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit on the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Double Play SuperBet 3. Double Play Superbet is a game of 5 reels and 25 lines the goal of which is to collect a winning combination. The game has the additional functions Double Play and Super Bet. 3.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 3.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 600 (six hundred euros). 3.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. The game is always played in 25 lines. The player may also choose the additional game functions Double Play and/or Super Bet. 3.3.1. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of game Lines the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet.

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50

€0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

3.3.2. If the optional additional function Double Play x6 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by two. 3.3.3. If the optional additional function Double Play x9 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by three. 3.3.4. If the optional additional function Super Bet x3 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by two. 3.3.5. If the optional additional function Super Bet x5 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by three. 3.3.6. If the additional functions Super Bet x3 and Double Bet x5 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by 4. 3.3.7. If the additional functions Super Bet x3 and Double Bet x9 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by 6. 3.3.8. If the additional functions Super Bet x5 and Double Bet x6 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by 8. 3.3.9. If the additional functions Super Bet x5 and Double Bet x9 is chosen, the Total Bet is multiplied by 12. 3.4. The additional function Double Play increases the value of the symbol Wild offering the player an opportunity to win a bigger amount of money: 3.4.1. The additional function Double Play x6 increases the value of the combination of symbols Wild and multiplies the winning by 6; in the additional spins, it multiplies the winning by 12. 3.4.2. The additional function Double Play x9 increases the value of the combination of symbols Wild and multiplies the winning by 9; in the additional spins, it multiplies the winning by 18. 3.5. The additional function Super Bet increases the chances for the symbol Wild to come up: 3.5.1. The additional function Super Bet x3 increases the chances to spin out the symbol Wild in the second, third and fourth reels. 3.5.2. The additional function Super Bet x5 increases the chances to spin out the symbol Wild in all five reels. 3.6. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

3.7. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

5x symbol Diamond Bet x 500 4x symbol Diamond Bet x 100 3x symbol Diamond Bet x 25 2x symbol Diamond Bet x 3 5x symbol 7 Bet x 250 4x symbol 7 Bet x 50 3x symbol 7 Bet x 20 2x symbol 7 Bet x 2 5x symbol Bell or Star Bet x 150 4x symbol Bell or Star Bet x 25 3x symbol Bell or Star Bet x 15 5x symbol Hearts, Spades, Diamonds, Bet x 100 Clubs or Big Spades 4x symbol Hearts, Spades, Diamonds, Bet x 20 Clubs or Big Spades 3x symbol Hearts, Spades, Diamonds, Bet x 10 Clubs or Big Spades 5x symbol Strawberry or Lemon Bet x 75 4x symbol Strawberry or Lemon Bet x 15 3x symbol Strawberry or Lemon Bet x 5 5x symbol Plum or Cherry Bet x 50 4x symbol Plum or Cherry Bet x 10 3x symbol Plum or Cherry Bet x 5 5x symbol Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet Bet x 2500 and 15 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet Bet x 250 and 15 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet Bet x 75 and 15 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet Bet x 25 5x symbol Wild Bet x 500 4x symbol Wild Bet x 100 3x symbol Wild Bet x 25 2x symbol Wild Bet x 3 Replaces any other symbol except Scatter DoublePlay SuperBet and helps the player to 5x symbol Wild make one or several above-mentioned combinations.

3.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Foxin Wins Foxin Wins is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 4.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Pot for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 4.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is €100 (one hundred euros). 4.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. The game is always played in 25 lines. 4.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

4.3.2. If the optional additional function Super Bet x1 is chosen, the Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 35. 4.3.3. If the optional additional function Super Bet x2 is chosen, the Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 50. 4.4. The additional function Super Bet increases the chances for coming up of the symbol Fox Pup: 4.4.1. The additional function Super Bet x1 increases the chances to spin out the symbol Fox Pup in the second, third and fourth reels. 4.4.2. The additional function Super Bet x2 increases the chances to spin out the symbol Fox Pup in all five reels.

4.4.3. At any time during the game, the symbol Fox Pup may turn into the symbol Wild Fox and to increase the player’s chances to make a winning combination. 4.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

4.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x Symbol Fox’s Car Bet x 1000 4x Symbol Fox’s Car Bet x 300 3x Symbol Fox’s Car Bet x 100 2x Symbol Fox’s Car Bet x 3 5x symbol House Bet x 500 4x symbol House Bet x 250 3x symbol House Bet x 50 2x symbol House Bet x 2 5x symbol Money or Glass Sphere Bet x 250 4x symbol Money or Glass Sphere Bet x 100 3x symbol Money or Glass Sphere Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 5x symbol Wild Fox Bet x 2000 4x symbol Wild Fox Bet x 500 3x symbol Wild Fox Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Fox Bet x 10 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Fox Pot and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 5x symbol Scatter Pot 100 and 10 additional spins. Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 4x symbol Scatter Pot 15 and 10 additional spins.

Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 3x symbol Scatter Pot 5 and 10 additional spins. Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 2x symbol Scatter Pot 1

4.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Gorilla Go Wild 5. Gorilla Go Wild is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional functions Gary‘s Bonus Time, Gary Goes Bananas, Gary the Gorilla‘s Feature Kingdom, Gorillionaire Win Spins Feature, Stay Wild Feature. Mega-rilla Multiplier Feature and More Wilds Feature. 5.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Temple for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 5.2. The minimum Bet is €0.30 (thirty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 60 (sixty euros). 5.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the stake amount which according to the rules of the game may not be lower than €0.30 (thirty euro cents) and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose an additional game function Super Bet. The game is always played in 25 lines. 5.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.30 €0.02 €0.60 €0.05 €1.50 €0.10 €3.00 €0.20 €6.00 €0.25 €7.50 €0.50 €15.00 €1.00 €30.00 €2.00 €60.00

5.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

5.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Golden Gorilla Bet x 1000 4x symbol Golden Gorilla Bet x 150 3x symbol Golden Gorilla Bet x 50 2x symbol Golden Gorilla Bet x 5 5x symbol Monkey Bet x 500 4x symbol Monkey Bet x 100 3x symbol Monkey Bet x 25 5x symbol Parrot Bet x 250 4x symbol Parrot Bet x 50 3x symbol Parrot Bet x 25 5x symbol Lemur Bet x 150 4x symbol Lemur Bet x 50 3x symbol Lemur Bet x 25 5x symbol A or K Bet x 100 4x symbol A or K Bet x 25 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 75

4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 15 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 5x symbol Wild Blue Gorilla Bet x 1500 4x symbol Wild Blue Gorilla Bet x 500 3x symbol Wild Blue Gorilla Bet x 50 2x symbol Wild Blue Gorilla Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Blue Gorilla Temple, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Scatter Temple Bet x 2500 4x symbol Scatter Temple Bet x 250 3x symbol Scatter Temple Bet x 125 2x symbol Scatter Temple Bet x 50

5.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. 5.7. Gary‘s Bonus Time is an additional function of winning. At any moment during a spin the player may accidentally win the Bet multiplied by 50, 100, 150, 300, 1000, or may win the option to play in the additional function described in subparagraph 5.9. 5.8. Gary Goes Bananas is an additional function of winning. Where Gary eats a banana at any moment during a spin, the chances to win Gary‘s Bonus Time are increased. 5.9. Gary the Gorilla‘s Feature Kingdom is an additional function of winning. Where 3 or more symbols Scatter Temple are lined up, the player is provided with one of the functions described below: 5.9.1. Gorillionaire win spins feature: 5.9.1.1. The player is provided 10 spins which will always include at least one winning combination. All winnings are doubled. 5.9.2. Stay Wild feature: 5.9.2.1. If the player participates in the game 5 or more times and lines up 3 or more symbols Scatter Temple, the player s provided 10 additional spins in which the symbols Wild Blue Gorilla lined up will remain in the reels and will allow the player to increase the winning. 5.9.3. Mega-rilla Multiplier feature: 5.9.3.1. If the player participates in the game 10 or more times and lines up 3 or more symbols Scatter Temple, the player is provided 10 additional spins in which the player may increase the winning up to 10 times.

5.9.3.1.1. Every time when the symbol Scatter Temple comes up in these additional spins, the multiplier is increased by one. 5.9.4. More Wilds feature: 5.9.4.1. If the player participates in the game 15 or more times and lines up 3 or more symbols Scatter Temple, the player is provided 10 additional spins in which any combination of symbols may be turned into the symbols Wild Blue Gorilla providing the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning. 5.9.5. All additional spins are played in the same lines and bets as chosen in the main spin which determined

the additional spin. Irish Eyes 2 6. Irish Eyes 2 is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 6.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Pot for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 6.2. The minimum Bet is €0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is €50 (fifty euros). 6.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 6.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 6.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

6.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Crown Bet x 1500 4x symbol Crown Bet x 500 3x symbol Crown Bet x 60 2x symbol Crown Bet x 5 5x symbol Hat Bet x 750

4x symbol Hat Bet x 250 3x symbol Hat Bet x 50 2x symbol Hat Bet x 4 5x symbol Pipe or Clover Bet x 400 4x symbol Pipe or Clover Bet x 100 3x symbol Pipe or Clover Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 75 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 50 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 5x symbol Wild Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Bet x 10 1x symbol Wild Bet x 2 Replaces any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Girl Pot and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. Total Bet x 100 and 20 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins will be tripled. 5x symbol Scatter Pot All additional spins are played in the same lines and bets as chosen in the main spin which determined the additional spin. Total Bet x 15 and 15 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins will be tripled. 4x symbol Scatter Pot All additional spins are played in the same lines and bets as chosen in the main spin which determined the additional spin. Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins will be tripled. 3x symbol Scatter Pot All additional spins are played in the same lines and bets as chosen in the main spin which determined the additional spin.

2x symbol Scatter Pot Total Bet x 2

6.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Medusa 2 7. Medusa 2 is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has an additional game feature. 7.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Medusa II for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 7.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is €50 (fifty euros). 7.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. The game is always played in 25 lines. 7.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field

Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

7.4. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Green snake Bet x 400 4x symbol Green snake Bet x 25 3x symbol Green snake Bet x 10 5x symbol Golden snakes Bet x 300 4x symbol Golden snakes Bet x 25 3x symbol Golden snakes Bet x 10 5x symbol Statute or Arrows Bet x 200 4x symbol Statute or Arrows Bet x 25 3x symbol Statute or Arrows Bet x 10 5x symbol Bracelet Bet x 100 4x symbol Bracelet Bet x 25 3x symbol Bracelet Bet x 10 5x symbol A, K, Q, J or 10 Bet x 50 4x symbol A, K, Q, J or 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol A, K, Q, J or 10 Bet x 5 5x symbol Face Bet x 500 4x symbol Face Bet x 50 3x symbol Face Bet x 20 Replaces any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Face Medusa II and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Scatter Medusa II Bet x 250 and 10 additional spins. The maximum number of additional spins that may be won during a game is 5. During any spin the second, third and fourth reels or, randomly, all five reels may lock themselves and spin until all symbols are the same, allowing the player to increase the winning. Bet x 125 and 10 additional spins. The maximum number of additional spins that may be won during a game is 5. During any 4x symbol Scatter Medusa II spin the second, third and fourth reels or, randomly, all five reels may lock themselves and spin until all symbols are the same, allowing the player to increase the winning. Bet x 50 and 10 additional spins. The maximum number of additional spins that may be won during a game is 5. During any 3x symbol Scatter Medusa II spin the second, third and fourth reels or, randomly, all five reels may lock themselves and spin until all symbols are the same, allowing the player to increase the winning.

7.5. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Miss Midas 8. Miss Midas is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet and an additional option of Miss Midas’ Touch. 8.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Castle for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 8.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is €100 (one hundred euros). 8.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. The game is always played in 25 lines.

8.3.1. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

8.3.2. If the optional additional function Super Bet x1 is chosen, the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 35.

8.3.3. If the optional additional function Super Bet x2 is chosen, the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 50. 8.4. The option Miss Midas’ Touch may accidentally replace the symbols Peacock and Throne with the symbol Wild Miss Midas. 8.4.1. The additional function Super Bet x1 increases the chances of Miss Midas Touch, and may accidentally replace the symbols Throne, Peacock and Fruit with the symbol Wild Miss Midas. 8.4.2. The additional function Super Bet x2 increases the chances of Miss Midas Touch, and may accidentally replace the symbols Throne, Peacock, Rose and Fruit with the symbol Wild Miss Midas. 8.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

8.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Peacock Bet x 400 4x symbol Peacock. Bet x 200 3x symbol Peacock. Bet x 30 2x symbol Peacock. Bet x 2 5x symbol Throne Bet x 300 4x symbol Throne Bet x 125 3x symbol Throne Bet x 25 2x symbol Throne Bet x 2 5x symbol Fruit or Rose Bet x 150 4x symbol Fruit or Rose Bet x 50

3x symbol Fruit or Rose Bet x 10 5x symbol A or K Bet x 100 4x symbol A or K Bet x 35 3x symbol A or K Bet x 7 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 75 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 2 5x symbol Wild Miss Midas Bet x 500 4x symbol Wild Miss Midas Bet x 250 3x symbol Wild Miss Midas Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Miss Midas Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Miss Midas Castle, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 2500 and 25 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 375 and 20 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 100 and 15 additional spins.

8.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Owl Eyes 9. Owl Eyes is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 9.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Moon for which the winnings are paid in any sequence.

9.2. The minimum Bet is €0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum Bet is €100 (one hundred euros). 9.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 50 Lines, and to push the button Spin.

9.3.1. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 9.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

9.5. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Tree Bet x 1000 4x symbol Tree Bet x 100 3x symbol Tree Bet x 25 5x symbol Badger Bet x 800 4x symbol Badger Bet x 60 3x symbol Badger Bet x 25 5x symbol Amanita Bet x 600 4x symbol Amanita Bet x 50 3x symbol Amanita Bet x 20 5x symbol Oyster Bet x 500 4x symbol Oyster Bet x 40 3x symbol Oyster Bet x 20

5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 30 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 100 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 75 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Moon, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. The Symbol Wild Owl winning is doubled. The symbols Wild Owl may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. 5x symbol Scatter Moon Total Bet x 100 and 5 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Moon Total Bet x 20 and 5 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Moon Total Bet x 5 and 5 additional spins.

9.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Spin Sorceress 10. Spin Sorceress is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 10.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Brooch for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 10.2. The minimum Bet is €0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is €1000 (one thousand euros). 10.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. The game is always played in 25 lines.

10.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

10.3.2. The additional function Super Bet provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning from 2 to 50 times if the winning combination includes the symbol Wild. The multiplier of the winning is chosen by chance and can be seen during the game cycle: 10.3.2.1. The additional function Super Bet x1 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 2, 3 or 5 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 50. 10.3.2.2. The additional function Super Bet x2 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her

winning 5, 8 or 12 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 125. 10.3.2.3. The additional function Super Bet x3 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 10, 15 or 20 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 200. 10.3.2.4. The additional function Super Bet x4 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 15, 20 or 25 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 300. 10.3.2.5. The additional function Super Bet x5 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 20, 30 or 50 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 500. 10.4. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Wolf Bet x 500 4x symbol Wolf Bet x 100 3x symbol Wolf Bet x 50 2x symbol Wolf Bet x 5 5x symbol Spells Bet x 250

4x symbol Spells Bet x 75 3x symbol Spells Bet x 25 5x symbol Sceptre Bet x 200 3x symbol Sceptre Bet x 50 2x symbol Sceptre Bet x 20 5x symbol Lotus Blossom Bet x 150 3x symbol Lotus Blossom Bet x 50 2x symbol Lotus Blossom Bet x 20 5x symbol A, K or Q Bet x 100 4x symbol A, K or Q Bet x 20 3x symbol A, K or Q Bet x 10 5x symbol J, 10 or 9 Bet x 50 4x symbol J, 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol J, 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Brooch, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. If the 5x symbol Wild function Super Bet is selected, the winnings are multiplied respectively. The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. 5x symbol Scatter Brooch Total Bet x 50 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Brooch Total Bet x 10 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Brooch Total Bet x 2 and 10 additional spins.

10.5. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Starmania 11. Starmania is a game of 5 reels, 10 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination.

11.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Bonus for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 11.2. The minimum Bet is €0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum Bet is €20 (twenty euros). 11.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. The game is always played in 10 lines. 11.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.10 €0.02 €0.20 €0.05 €0.50 €0.10 €1.00 €0.20 €2.00 €0.25 €2.50 €0.50 €5.00 €1.00 €10.00 €2.00 €20.00

11.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

11.5. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Bet x 500 4x symbol Bet x 100 3x symbol Bet x 25

2x symbol Bet x 4 5x symbol Bet x 100 4x symbol Bet x 60 3x symbol Bet x 15 5x symbol or Bet x 75 4x symbol or Bet x 30 3x symbol or Bet x 8 5x symbol , or Bet x 50 5x symbol , or Bet x 10 5x symbol , or Bet x 4 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Bonus, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned 5x symbol Wild combinations. The symbol Wild may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. Bet x 200 and 10 additional spins. The 5x symbol Scatter Bonus symbol may come up in all reels. Bet x 100 and 10 additional spins. The 4x symbol Scatter Bonus symbol may come up in all reels. Bet x 20 and 10 additional spins. The 3x symbol Scatter Bonus symbol may come up in all reels.

11.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Merlin‘s Millions SuperBet 12. Merlin‘s Millions is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 12.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Orb for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 12.2. The minimum Bet is €0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum Bet is €70 (seventy euros). 12.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. The game is always played in 50 lines. 12.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.50 €0.02 €1.00 €0.05 €2.50 €0.10 €5.00 €0.20 €10.00

12.3.2. The additional function Super Bet provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning from 2 to 10 times if the symbol Wild Merlin opens in the winning combination: 12.3.2.1. The additional function Super Bet x2 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 2 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 100. 12.3.2.2. The additional function Super Bet x4 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 4 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 150. 12.3.2.3. The additional function Super Bet x6 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 6 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 250. 12.3.2.4. The additional function Super Bet x8 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 8 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 300. 12.3.2.5. The additional function Super Bet x10 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 10 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 350. 12.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

12.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Book Bet x 1000 4x symbol Book Bet x 100 3x symbol Book Bet x 25 5x symbol Sceptre Bet x 300 4x symbol Sceptre Bet x 100 3x symbol Sceptre Bet x 25

5x symbol Elixir or A Bet x 200 4x symbol Elixir or A Bet x 50 3x symbol Elixir or A Bet x 20

5x symbol K or Q Bet x 100 4x symbol K or Q Bet x 25 3x symbol K or Q Bet x 10 5x symbol J or 10 Bet x 75 4x symbol J or 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol J or 10 Bet x 5 5x symbol 9 Bet x 50 4x symbol 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 9 Bet x 5 Replaces any other symbol except Scatter Orb and helps the player to make one or Symbol Wild Merlin several above-mentioned combinations. The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 3x symbol Scatter Orb 2 and 5 additional spins.

12.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Mad Mad Monkey 13. Mad Mad Monkey is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 13.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Mad Mad Monkey for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 13.2. The minimum Bet is €0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is €10 (ten euros). 13.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 50 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 13.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 13.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

13.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Banana Bet x 1000 4x symbol Banana Bet x 50 3x symbol Banana Bet x 24 2x symbol Banana Bet x 4 5x symbol Parrot Bet x 1000 4x symbol Parrot Bet x 50 3x symbol Parrot Bet x 24 5x symbol Snake or Coconuts Bet x 400 4x symbol Snake or Coconuts Bet x 40 3x symbol Snake or Coconuts Bet x 20 5x symbol Nuts or A Bet x 300 4x symbol Nuts or A Bet x 30 3x symbol Nuts or A Bet x 10 5x symbol K or Q Bet x 250 4x symbol K or Q Bet x 24 3x symbol K or Q Bet x 8 5x symbol J or 10 Bet x 200

4x symbol J or 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol J or 10 Bet x 6 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Mad Mad Monkey, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned Symbol Monkey combinations. The winning is doubled. The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. 5x symbol Scatter Mad Mad Monkey Total Bet x 400 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Mad Mad Monkey Total Bet x 30 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Mad Mad Monkey Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Mad Mad Monkey Total Bet x 2

13.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player

has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Roulette Master 14. Roulette Master is a game the goal of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a revolving disk (roulette) is going to stop. The disk has 37 partitions numbered from 0 to 36 inclusive. Each number is either red or black, except 0 which is marked in green. 14.1. In the game, chips of a certain value are used; their monetary denomination in euros indicated on each of them. The minimum Bet is €0.01 (one euro cent), the maximum Bet is €1000 (one thousand euros). 14.2. The player makes bets by clicking at the selected place (-s) of the main and/or additional table. 14.3. The main tables of bets displays the numbers from 1 to 36 and 0, and the chances (columns, dozens, red and black, small numbers (1–18) and big numbers (19–36). 14.4. The additional table displays the numbers from 1 to 36 and 0, arranged in an oval field in the same sequence as on the disk of roulette and are divided into 3 sectors: Voisins, Orphelins, Tiers. 14.5. In the main table the player may choose to place his/her bet on one or several numbers, even or odd numbers, or on groups of numbers: 14.5.1. Straight up – the bet is placed directly on one of the numbers. 14.5.2. Split – the bet is placed on the line between any two numbers. 14.5.3. Street – the bet is placed on three numbers located in the same vertical column of the table;

14.5.4. Trio – the bet is placed on the intersecting line among 0, 1 and 2 or 0, 2 and 3; 14.5.5. Corner – the bet is placed on the intersection of 4 numbers; 14.5.6. Four Bet – the bet is placed on the line that covers the numbers 0, 1, 2 and 3; 14.5.7. Six Line – the bet is placed at the end of the horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 14.5.8. Column – the bet is placed on the field marked “2-1” which marks one of the three horizontal lines of the table (12 numbers). In such a case the bet is placed on all 12 numbers in one line except 0. 14.5.9. Dozen – the bet is placed on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12” and “3rd 12”, which include 12 numbers respectively. 14.5.10. Small/big numbers (“1-18” and “19-36”) – the bet is placed on the field marked with the numbers “1- 18” or “19-36”, each of which includes 18 numbers respectively. 14.5.11. Red/Black – the bet is placed on the field marked in red or black. This bet includes all numbers which are red or black respectively. 14.5.12. Even/Odd – the bet is placed on the field marked “Even” which includes all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd” which includes all odd numbers. 14.6. The winning of the main bets is determined according to the amount of the bet placed by the player and the determined winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Minimum bet Maximum bet

Straight up 35:1 0.01 250

Split 17:1 0.05 500 Street 11:1 0.10 750 Trio 11:1 0.10 750 Corner 8:1 0.20 1000 Four bet 8:1 0.20 1000 Six line 5:1 0.25 1000 Column 2:1 0.50 1000 Dozen 2:1 0.50 1000 Low/ High 1:1 1 1000 Red/Black 1:1 1 1000 Even/Odd 1:1 1 1000

14.7. In the additional table the player may make the following bets:

14.7.1. Voisins – the bet is placed on the field Voisins which includes the numbers 22, 18, 29, 7, 28, 12, 35, 3, 26, 0, 32, 15, 19, 4, 21, 2, 25. It includes 16 numbers and 0 located next to each other on the roulette disk. 14.7.2. Tiers – the bet is placed by clicking on the filed marked “Tiers” which includes the numbers 27, 13, 36, 11, 30, 8, 23, 10, 5, 24, 16, 33. It includes 12 numbers located next to each other on the roulette disk. 14.7.3. Orphelins – the bet is placed by clicking on the field marked “Orphelins” which includes the numbers 17, 34, 6, 1, 20, 14, 31, 9. It includes 8 numbers between Orphelins and Tiers. 14.7.4. Red splits – the bet is placed on the field marked “Red Splits” which includes pairs of red numbers located next to each other in the main table. It includes 9, 12, 16, 18, 19, 21, 27, 30 14.7.5. Black Splits – the bet is placed on the field marked “Black Splits” which includes pairs of red numbers located next to each other in the main table. It includes 8, 10, 11, 13, 17, 20, 26, 28, 29, 31. 14.8. The player may also make special bets that may be selected by pushing the button Special on the right of the screen. 14.8.1. Zero Game – the bet includes the number 0 and six other numbers next to it:. 15, 32, 26, 3, 35, 12. 14.8.2. Finale Plein – the player may select a number from 0 to 9 and place the bet on several indicated numbers at a time:

Selection The bet is placed 0 0, 10, 20, 30 1 1, 11, 21, 31 2 2, 12, 22, 32 3 3, 13, 23, 33 4 4, 14, 24, 34 5 5, 15, 25, 35 6 6, 16, 26, 36 7 7, 17, 27

8 8, 18, 28 9 9, 19, 29

14.8.3. Finale Cheval Plein – the player may select pairs of numbers from 0/1 to 9/10 and place the bet on several indicated numbers at a time: Selection The bet is placed 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21, 30, 0/1 31 1, 2, 11, 12, 21, 22, 31, 1/2 32 2, 3, 12, 13, 22, 23, 32, 2/3 33

3, 4, 13, 14, 23, 24, 33, ¾ 34 4, 2, 14, 15, 24, 25, 34, 4/5 35 5, 6, 15, 16, 25, 26, 35, 5/6 36 6/7 6, 7, 16, 17, 26, 27, 36 7/8 7, 8, 17, 18, 27, 28 8/9 8, 9, 18, 19, 28, 29 9/10 9, 10, 19, 20, 29, 30

14.8.4. Finale Cheval – the player may select a number from 0/3 to 9/12 and place the bet on several indicated numbers at a time: Selection The bet is placed 0, 3, 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 0/3 33 1, 4, 11, 14, 21, 24, 31, 1/4 34 2, 5, 12, 15, 22, 25, 32, 2/5 35 3, 6, 13, 16, 23, 26, 33, 3/6 36 4/7 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27 5/8 5, 8, 15, 18, 25, 28 6/9 6, 9, 16, 19, 26, 29 7/10 7, 10, 17, 20, 27, 30 8/11 8, 11, 18, 21, 28, 31 9/12 9, 12, 19, 22, 29, 32

14.9. The window of the game always displays the Balance of the player’s money intended for the game, the Total Stake, and the Win. A Dragons Story 15. A Dragons Story is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 15.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Brooch for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 15.2. The minimum Bet is €0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is €100 (one hundred euros).

15.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet x3, and Super Bet x5. The game is always played in 25 lines. 15.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

15.3.2. The additional function Super Bet marked by the symbols Little Dragons increases the chances for the symbol Wild Dragon to come up; 15.3.2.1. The additional function Super Bet x3 increases the chances for the symbol Wild Dragon to come up in the second, third and fourth reels. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 35. 15.3.2.2. The additional function Super Bet x5 increases the chances for the symbol Wild Dragon to come up in all five reels. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 50. 15.3.2.3. If none of the above-mentioned additional functions are selected, the chances for the symbol Wild Dragon to come up is increased only in the third reel. 15.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

15.5. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Jewels Bet x 1000 4x symbol Jewels Bet x 300 3x symbol Jewels Bet x 100 2x symbol Jewels Bet x 3 5x symbol Warrior Bet x 500 4x symbol Warrior Bet x 250 3x symbol Warrior Bet x 50 2x symbol Warrior Bet x 2 5x symbol Shield or Shoe Bet x 250 4x symbol Shield or Shoe Bet x 100 3x symbol Shield or Shoe Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Brooch, and helps the player to make one or Symbol Wild Dragon several above-mentioned combinations. The winning is doubled. 5x symbol Scatter Brooch Bet x 2500 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Brooch Bet x 375 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Brooch Bet x 125 and 10 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Brooch Bet x 25 If this symbols comes up, the player may win Symbol The Brave Sir William and the the Bet multiplied by 50, 75, 100, 125, 200, Fireball 250, 375, 500, 625 or 1250.

15.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Medusa 16. Medusa is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. 16.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Medusa and Scatter Pegasus for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 16.2. The minimum Bet is €0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is €50 (fifty euros). 16.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 16.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the initial amount of the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet. 16.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

16.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Temple Bet x 5000 4x symbol Temple Bet x 200 3x symbol Temple Bet x 100 2x symbol Temple Bet x 5 5x symbol Warriors Bet x 2000 4x symbol Warriors Bet x 100 3x symbol Warriors Bet x 50 2x symbol Warriors Bet x 2 5x symbol Snake or Coin Bet x 500 4x symbol Snake or Coin Bet x 40 3x symbol Snake or Coin Bet x 20 5x symbol Earrings or Shoes Bet x 200 4x symbol Earrings or Shoes Bet x 20 3x symbol Earrings or Shoes Bet x 15 5x symbol Vase or Grapes Bet x 150 4x symbol Vase or Grapes Bet x 15 3x symbol Vase or Grapes Bet x 10 5x symbol Spear Bet x 100 4x symbol Spear Bet x 10

3x symbol Spear Bet x 5 3 additional respins in which all winnings are tripled. The chances for the symbol Medusa 3x symbol Medusa Face Face to come up in the second, third and fourth reels are increased. Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Medusa Face player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations. Total Bet x 250 and 10 additional spins in 5x symbol Scatter Medusa which all winnings are doubled. Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins in 4x symbol Scatter Medusa which all winnings are doubled. Total Bet x 5 and 10 additional spins in which 3x symbol Scatter Medusa all winnings are doubled. 2x symbol Scatter Medusa Total Bet x 2 Offers the player the possibility to select two 3x symbol Scatter Pegasus symbols Pegasus to be opened by chance increasing his/her winning up to 50 times. 1 to 3 additional spins during which the winnings are multiplied by 5. The symbol may come up only in the third reel and only by Symbol Warrior lining up 3 or more symbols Scatter Medusa. The additional spins of the symbol Warrior are played after 10 additional spins with the symbols Scatter Medusa won previously. Where the symbol Scatter Pegasus comes up in the additional spins won with the symbols Scatter Medusa, the winning is doubled. Symbol Scatter Pegasus Where the symbol Scatter Pegasus comes up in the additional spins won with the symbol Warrior, the winning is multiplied by 5.

16.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Volcano Eruption

17. Volcano Eruption is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has an additional function of Eruption. 17.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Volcano for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 17.2. The minimum Bet is €0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is €50 (fifty euros). 17.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 17.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the initial amount of the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet. 17.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

17.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Lizard Bet x 500 4x symbol Lizard Bet x 150 3x symbol Lizard Bet x 25 2x symbol Lizard Bet x 3 5x symbol Parrot Bet x 250 4x symbol Parrot Bet x 50 3x symbol Parrot Bet x 20 2x symbol Parrot Bet x 3 5x symbol Monkey or Oranges Bet x 200 4x symbol Monkey or Oranges Bet x 30

3x symbol Monkey or Oranges Bet x 15 5x symbol A or K Bet x 150 4x symbol A or K Bet x 25 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 125 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 15 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 8 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5

Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Volcano, and helps the player to make one or Symbol Wild Volcano several above-mentioned combinations. The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. Total Bet x 5 and 5 additional respins. During the additional spins the chances for the 3x symbol Scatter Volcano symbol Wild Volcano to come up are increased. 2x symbol Volcano Total Bet x 2

17.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Witch pickings 18. Witch pickings is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has an additional function Witches Bonus. 18.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Three Witches for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 18.2. The minimum Bet is €0.40 (forty euro cents). The maximum Bet is €80 (eighty euros). 18.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet which may not be lower than the minimum Bet amount, and to push the button Spin. The game is always played in 25 lines. 18.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 0,40 EUR €0.02 €0.80 €0.05 €2.00 €0.10 €4.00 €0.20 €8.00 €0.25 €10.00 €0.50 €20.00 €1.00 €40.00 €2.00 €80.00

18.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

18.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Castle Bet x 800 4x symbol Castle Bet x 100 3x symbol Castle Bet x 50 5x symbol Cauldron Bet x 600 4x symbol Cauldron Bet x 80 3x symbol Cauldron Bet x 40 5x symbol Magic Drink Bet x 500 4x symbol Magic Drink Bet x 50 3x symbol Magic Drink Bet x 30 5x symbol Charm Bet x 400 4x symbol Pendant Bet x 50 3x symbol Pendant Bet x 30 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 40 3x symbol A or K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 100 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 20 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 Substitutes any other symbol and helps the 5x symbol Wild player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Bet x 1000 4x symbol Wild Bet x 200 3x symbol Wild Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Bet x 20 5x symbol Scatter Three Witches Bet x 625

4x symbol Scatter Three Witches Bet x 250 3x symbol Scatter Three Witches Bet x 100 2x symbol Scatter Three Witches Bet x 50

18.6. Where the symbol Scatter Three Witches come up in the gaming reels, the function Witches Bonus opens for the player, and he/she wins 5 (five additional spins (“Witches Bonus”). Before starting to play the additional games, the player has the option to choose 3 additional features – one features from tree witches displayed on the screen: 18.6.1. Blue Witch: the player may choose one of the following functions which will be used in the additional games: 18.6.1.1. Symbols the same. One of the symbols is chosen randomly: Castle, Cauldron, Magic Drink or Pendant with a Cat. All symbols Castle, Cauldron, Magic Drink or Pendant with a Cat turn into a selected symbol in additional games.

18.6.1.2. Symbols stacked. One of the symbols is chosen randomly: Castle, Cauldron, Magic Drink or Pendant with a Cat. The number of symbols coming up in each gaming reel is higher than usual, and this increases the chances to collect the winning combination of these symbols. 18.6.1.3. Symbol prizes one of the symbols is chosen randomly: Castle, Cauldron, Magic Drink or Pendant with a Cat. An additional winning is received for each selected symbol collected in the additional games; the amount of the winning is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 50 or 25. 18.6.2. Red Witch: the player may choose one of the following functions which will be used in the additional games: 18.6.2.1. Expanding Wilds. Each symbol Wild that comes up is tripled and covers all three positions of the reel. 18.6.2.2. Extra Wilds. More symbols Wild come up in all gaming reels. 18.6.2.3. Wild Multiplier. When a combination of symbols Wild is collected, each winning is multiplied by 2, 3, 4, 5 or 10. 18.6.3. Green Witch: the player may choose one of the following functions which will be used in the additional games: 18.6.3.1. All Wins Multiplier: Al winnings are multiplied by 2, 3, 4 or 5. 18.6.3.2. Pays Both Ways. All winnings are paid for the symbols that are in one winning line from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Three Witches which may be arranged in any sequence. 18.6.3.3. Extra 5 Games. Additional games are offered. 18.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Jackpot Jester 50000 19. Jackpot Jester 50000 is a game of 3 reels, 5 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has two gaming options Bet 10 and Bet 20, and an additional game – Super Game. 19.1. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

19.2. The minimum Bet €0.10 (ten euro cents), the maximum Bet €200 (two hundred euros). 19.3. In the game, virtual chips are used; their value is determined according to the selected type of the game, by adjusting the denomination of chips by the symbols “+” and “-”. Total Stake in the Total Stake in the Bet denomination game Bet 10 game Bet 20 0.01 €0.10 €0.20 0.02 €0.20 €0.40 0.05 €0.50 €1.00 0.10 €1.00 €2.00 0.20 €2.00 €4.00 0.25 €2.50 €5.00 0.50 €5.00 €10.00 1.00 €10.00 €20.00 2.00 €20.00 €40.00

19.4. In order to participate in the game, the player must select the amount by the button Bet, to select the denomination of chips, and to push the button Spin. 19.4.1. Upon pushing the button Max bet 20, the player will take part in the game Bet 20 straight away. 19.5. The winning combinations in the game Bet 10: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 3x symbol Jester Denomination of chips x 1000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 150 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 100 3x symbol Watermelon Denomination of chips x 50 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 40 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 30 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 20

Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild Jester player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations.

19.6. Lucky combinations in the game Bet 20: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

3x symbol Jester Denomination of chips x 2000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 400 3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 300 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Watermelon Denomination of chips x 100 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 80 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 60 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 40 Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild Jester player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations.

19.6.1. Where the player plays the game Bet 20, the chips won accumulate and may be used in the Super Game. The player may collect his/her winning at any time by pushing the button Collect. 19.7. Additional game Super Game: 19.7.1. Where the player collects any winning combination specified in Clause 19.6 in the game Bet 20, and collects at least 100 chips, he/she is offered the option to participate in the Super Game by pushing the button Super Game. 19.7.2. Lucky combinations in the Super Game:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 3x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 10000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 3000 3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 2000 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 1000 3x symbol Watermelon Denomination of chips x 500 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 400 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 100 Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild Jester player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations. 9x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 50000

19.7.3. After any guess the player may collect his/her winning at any time by pushing the button Collect. 19.7.4. The additional game is optional.

Jackpot Jester Wild Nudge 20. Jackpot Jester Wild Nudge is a game of 3 reels, 5 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has two gaming options Bet 10 and Bet 20, and an additional game – Super Game. 20.1. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

20.2. The minimum Bet €0.10 (ten euro cents), the maximum Bet €200 (two hundred euros). 20.3. In the game, virtual chips are used; their value is determined according to the selected type of the game, by adjusting the denomination of chips by the symbols “+” and “-”.

Total Stake in the Total Stake in the Bet denomination game Bet 10 game Bet 20 0.01 €0.10 €0.20 0.02 €0.20 €0.40 0.05 €0.50 €1.00 0.10 €1.00 €2.00 0.20 €2.00 €4.00 0.25 €2.50 €5.00 0.50 €5.00 €10.00 1.00 €10.00 €20.00 2.00 €20.00 €40.00

20.4. In order to participate in the game, the player must select the amount by the button Bet, to select the denomination of chips, and to push the button Spin. 20.4.1. Upon pushing the button Max bet 20, the player will take part in the game Bet 20 straight away. 20.5. The winning combinations in the game Bet 10:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 3x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 1000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Diamond Denomination of chips x 150

3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 100 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 50 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 40 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 30 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 20 Symbol Wild Jester Substitutes any other symbol and helps the

player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations.

20.6. Lucky combinations in the game Bet 20: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 3x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 2000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 400 3x symbol Diamond Denomination of chips x 300 3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 100 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 80 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 60 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 40 Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild Jester player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations.

20.6.1. Where the player plays the game Bet 20, the chips won accumulate and may be used in the Super Game. The player may collect his/her winning at any time by pushing the button Collect. 20.7. Additional Super Game: 20.7.1. Where the player collects any winning combination specified in Clause 20.6 in the game Bet 20, and collects at least 100 chips, he/she is offered the option to participate in the additional Super Game. 20.7.2. Lucky combinations in the Super Game: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 3x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 20000 3x symbol 7 Denomination of chips x 2000 3x symbol Diamond Denomination of chips x 1000

3x symbol Bell Denomination of chips x 1000 3x symbol Strawberry Denomination of chips x 400 3x symbol Plum Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Lemon Denomination of chips x 200 3x symbol Cherry Denomination of chips x 100 Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild Jester player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations. 9x symbol Wild Jester Denomination of chips x 100000

20.7.3. After any guess the player may collect his/her winning at any time by pushing the button Collect. 20.7.4. The additional game is optional. An Evening with Holly Madison 21. An Evening with Holly Madison is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 21.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Holly for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 21.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.30 (thirty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 60 (sixty euros). 21.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 21.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 30 (the minimum Bet) and is displayed in the field Total Bet.

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.30 €0.02 €0.60 €0.05 €1.50 €0.10 €3.00 €0.20 €6.00 €0.25 €7.50 €0.50 €15.00 €1.00 €30.00 €2.00 €60.00

21.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

21.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Holly Bet x 1250 and 10 additional re-spins. 4x symbol Scatter Holly Bet x 125 and 10 additional re-spins. 3x symbol Scatter Holly Bet x 50 and 10 additional re-spins. 2x symbol Scatter Holly Bet x 25 5x symbol Cards Bet x 2000 4x symbol Cards Bet x 250 3x symbol Cards Bet x 50 2x symbol Cards Bet x 5 5x symbol Dice Bet x 500 4x symbol Dice Bet x 100 3x symbol Dice Bet x 30 5x symbol Car Bet x 200

4x symbol Car Bet x 50 3x symbol Car Bet x 20 5x symbol Hat Bet x 200 4x symbol Hat Bet x 40 3x symbol Hat Bet x 20

5x symbol Mask Bet x 150 4x symbol Mask Bet x 30 3x symbol Mask Bet x 15 5x symbol Shoes Bet x 150 4x symbol Shoes Bet x 30 3x symbol Shoes Bet x 15 5x symbol Heart Bet x 100 4x symbol Heart Bet x 20 3x symbol Heart Bet x 10 5x symbol Drum Bet x 100 4x symbol Drum Bet x 20 3x symbol Drum Bet x 10 5x symbol Cross Bet x 100 4x symbol Cross Bet x 10 3x symbol Cross Bet x 5 5x symbol Wine Bet x 100 4x symbol Wine Bet x 10 3x symbol Wine Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Holly, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. The symbols may come up only in the second, 5x symbol Wild third and fourth reels. When a winning combination that includes at least one symbol Wild is lined up, this symbol expands and covers all positions in the reel in which it came up.

21.7. Where 2 symbols Scatter Holly in come up in any combination in the reels, the player wins one additional respin in which the symbols Scatter Holly stay and only the remaining reels spin. No additional respins can be won in the respin. 21.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Bingo Billions 22. Bingo Billions is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 22.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Bingo Billions for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 22.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 22.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 22.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 22.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

22.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Wild Man Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Man Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Man Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Man Bet x 10 1x symbol Wild Man Bet x 2 Total Bet x 100 and 20 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Bingo Billions winnings in the additional spins are tripled.

Total Bet x 15 and 15 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Bingo Billions winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Bingo Billions winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Bingo Billions Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Money Bet x 1500 4x symbol Money Bet x 500 3x symbol Money Bet x 60 2x symbol Money Bet x 5

5x symbol Bingo Tickets Bet x 750 4x symbol Bingo Tickets Bet x 250 3x symbol Bingo Tickets Bet x 50 2x symbol Bingo Tickets Bet x 4 5x symbol Gold Bars Bet x 400 4x symbol Gold Bars Bet x 100 3x symbol Gold Bars Bet x 20 5x symbol Ball 88 or Ball 55 Bet x 200 4x symbol Ball 88 or Ball 55 Bet x 75 3x symbol Ball 88 or Ball 55 Bet x 15 5x symbol Ball 49 or Ball 36 Bet x 150 4x symbol Ball 49 or Ball 36 Bet x 50 3x symbol Ball 49 or Ball 36 Bet x 10 5x symbol Ball 21 or Ball 16 Bet x 100 4x symbol Ball 21 or Ball 16 Bet x 20 3x symbol Ball 21 or Ball 16 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Bingo Billions, and helps the player to make Symbol Wild Man one or several above-mentioned combinations.

22.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. James Dean 23. James Dean is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 23.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols James Dean Hollywood Star and Purple James Dean for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 23.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 23.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 23.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

23.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

23.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 250 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. During the additional spins in the third reel the chances for the symbol Clapperboard to 5x symbol James Dean Hollywood Star come up are increased; if this symbol comes up, the player wins up to three Legend Spins. All winnings in the Legend Spins are multiplied by 5. Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. During the additional spins in the third reel the chances for the symbol Clapperboard to 4x symbol James Dean Hollywood Star come up are increased; if this symbol comes up, the player wins up to three Legend Spins. All winnings in the Legend Spins are multiplied by 5. Total Bet x 5 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 3x symbol James Dean Hollywood Star During the additional spins in the third reel the chances for the symbol Clapperboard to come up are increased; if this symbol comes

up, the player wins up to three Legend Spins. All winnings in the Legend Spins are multiplied by 5. 2x symbol James Dean Hollywood Star Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Car Bet x 5000 4x symbol Car Bet x 200

3x symbol Car Bet x 100 2x symbol Car Bet x 5 5x symbol Motorbike Bet x 2000 4x symbol Motorbike Bet x 100 3x symbol Motorbike Bet x 50 2x symbol Motorbike Bet x 2 5x symbol Cinefilm or Glasses Bet x 500 4x symbol Cinefilm or Glasses Bet x 40 3x symbol Cinefilm or Glasses Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 20 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 15 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Purple James Dean, Clapperboard and James Dean Hollywood Star, and helps the player to make Symbol Blue James Dean one or several above-mentioned combinations. The symbol Blue James Dean may come up only in the second, third and fourth reel.

23.7. Where 3 symbols Blue James Dean are lined up in any combination in the reels, the player wins three respins in which the symbols Blue James Dean stay and only the remaining reels spin. The winnings of the respins are tripled. No additional respins can be won in the respin. 23.8. When the reels line up 3 symbols Purple James Dean in any combination, the player is offered James Dean Pick bonus in which he/she may win the amount of the Bet multiplied up to 150 times be choosing one of the emerging symbols Purple James Dean. 23.9. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Giant Gems 24. Giant Gems is a game of 5 reels, 10 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has an additional function Fortune Spins. 24.1. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 24.2. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. In addition, the player may choose the additional function Fortune Spins. 24.3. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

24.4. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Red Gem Bet x 5000 4x symbol Red Gem Bet x 500 3x symbol Red Gem Bet x 100 5x symbol Diamond Bet x 1000 4x symbol Diamond Bet x 200 3x symbol Diamond Bet x 80 5x symbol Green Gem or Purple Gem Bet x 400 4x symbol Green Gem or Purple Gem Bet x 100 3x symbol Green Gem or Purple Gem Bet x 50 5x symbol A Bet x 200 4x symbol A Bet x 50 3x symbol A Bet x 20

5x symbol K Bet x 200 4x symbol K Bet x 50 3x symbol K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q Bet x 150

4x symbol Q Bet x 30 3x symbol Q Bet x 10 5x symbol J Bet x 150 4x symbol J Bet x 30 3x symbol J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 Bet x 150 4x symbol 10 Bet x 30 3x symbol 10 Bet x 10

24.5. The additional function Fortune Spins increases the chances for the winning symbols for which bigger winnings are granted to come up. In order to use this function the player must push the button Fortune Spins and to select how many times he/she intends to increase the Total Bet. The bigger the number of times in which the bet is increased, the higher the chances to line up the winning combinations. Foxin‘ Wins Again 25. Foxin’ Wins Again is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 25.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Bell for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 25.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros). 25.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. In addition, the player may also choose the additional game function Super Bet. 25.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.50 €0.02 €1 €0.05 €2.50 €0.10 €5.00 €0.20 €10.00 €0.25 €12.50

€0.50 €25.00 €1.00 €50.00 €2.00 €100.00

25.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

25.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Wild Dog-Fox Bet x 2000 4x symbol Wild Dog-Fox Bet x 500 3x symbol Wild Dog-Fox Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Dog-Fox Bet x 10 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Dog-Fox Bell, and helps the player to collect a winning combination. Bet x 5000 and 10 additional re-spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 5x symbol Scatter Bell When the additional spins are used up, the player may choose to collect the winning or to repeat the additional spins. Bet x 750 and 10 additional re-spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 4x symbol Scatter Bell When the additional spins are used up, the player may choose to collect the winning or to repeat the additional spins. Bet x 250 and 10 additional re-spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 3x symbol Scatter Bell When the additional spins are used up, the player may choose to collect the winning or to repeat the additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Bell Bet x 50 5x symbol Fox Bet x 1000 4x symbol Fox Bet x 300 3x symbol Fox Bet x 100 2x symbol Fox Bet x 3 5x symbol Ship Bet x 500 4x symbol Ship Bet x 250 3x symbol Ship Bet x 50 2x symbol Ship Bet x 2 5x symbol Cocktail or Compass Bet x 250 4x symbol Cocktail or Compass Bet x 100 3x symbol Cocktail or Compass Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10

5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 25.7. The additional function Superbet increases the chances to line up the symbols Wild Dog-Fox. In order to use this function the player must push the button Superbet 1 or Superbet 2. If Superbet 1 is chosen, the chances to line up the symbols Wild are increased in reels 2, 3 and 4, and the minimum Bet is EUR 0.75 (seventy-five euro cents). If Superbet 2 is chosen, the chances to line up the symbols Wild Dog-Fox are increased in all five reels, and the minimum Bet is EUR 1 (one euro). 25.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Jack‘s Beanstalk 26. Jack‘s Beanstalk is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination, which includes an additional Golden Egg bonus. 26.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols which are calculated from the left to the right. 26.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 26.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 26.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

26.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

26.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Jack Bet x 2500 4x symbol Jack Bet x 250 3x symbol Jack Bet x 50 2x symbol Jack Bet x 5 1x symbol Jack Bet x 1 5x symbol Bearded Man Bet x 1000 4x symbol Bearded Man Bet x 100 3x symbol Bearded Man Bet x 25 2x symbol Bearded Man Bet x 5 5x symbol Castle Bet x 500 4x symbol Castle Bet x 50 3x symbol Castle Bet x 25 5x symbol Harp Bet x 250 4x symbol Harp Bet x 40 3x symbol Harp Bet x 20

5x symbol Ax Bet x 250 4x symbol Ax Bet x 30 3x symbol Ax Bet x 15 5x symbol A Bet x 100 4x symbol A Bet x 20 3x symbol A Bet x 5 5x symbol K Bet x 100 4x symbol K Bet x 20 3x symbol K Bet x 5 5x symbol Q Bet x 100 4x symbol Q Bet x 20 3x symbol Q Bet x 5 5x symbol J Bet x 100 4x symbol J Bet x 15 3x symbol J Bet x 5

5x symbol 10 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 Bet x 15 3x symbol 10 Bet x 5 Symbol Magic Beans that comes up in 3 additional spins reel 2, 3 or 4

26.7. Where the symbol Golden Egg comes up in the gaming reels, the Golden Egg bonus opens for the player. In the bonus game, the player must select three out of five emerging symbols Goose. For each selected symbol, the player may win a winning in the amount of the Bet multiplied by 25, 50, 75, 125, 250, 375, 500 or 2500. Titan Storm 27. Titan Storm is a game of 5 reels, 243 variants the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 27.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Gate for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 27.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 27.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 27.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet selected by the player by 25, and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

27.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 50 and 10 additional spins. Where 5 symbols that are the same are lined up during 3x symbol Scatter Gate the additional spins, the winning is multiplied by 5. 5x symbol Lady with a Spear Bet x 2000 4x symbol Lady with a Spear Bet x 200 3x symbol Lady with a Spear Bet x 50 2x symbol Lady with a Spear Bet x 10 5x symbol Meteorite Bet x 1000 4x symbol Meteorite Bet x 100 3x symbol Meteorite Bet x 50 2x symbol Meteorite Bet x 10 5x symbol Blue Titan Bet x 500 4x symbol Blue Titan Bet x 50 3x symbol Blue Titan Bet x 25 5x symbol Dagger or Shield Bet x 200 4x symbol Dagger or Shield Bet x 50 3x symbol Dagger or Shield Bet x 25 5x symbol A or K Bet x 100 4x symbol A or K Bet x 40 3x symbol A or K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 100 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 30 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 15 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 25 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 10 additional spins (where 5 symbols that are the same are lined up during the additional 3x symbol Wild spins, the winning is multiplied by 5). May come up only in reels 2, 3 and 4. Substitutes any other symbol and helps the Symbol Wild player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations.

27.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game.

Judge Dredd

28. Judge Dredd is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 28.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Badge Dredd for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 28.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 28.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. In addition, the player may also choose the additional game function Super Bet. 28.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25

€0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

28.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

28.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Judge Dredd Badge Dredd, and helps to make a winning combination of symbols. 5x symbol Wild Judge Dredd Bet x 2000 4x symbol Wild Judge Dredd Bet x 500 3x symbol Wild Judge Dredd Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Judge Dredd Bet x 10 Bet x 2500 and 10 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Badge Dredd winnings in the additional spins are doubled. Bet x 375 and 10 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Badge Dredd winnings in the additional spins are doubled.

Bet x 125 and 10 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Badge Dredd winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 2x symbol Scatter Badge Dredd Bet x 25 5x symbol Skull Bet x 1000 4x symbol Skull Bet x 300 3x symbol Skull Bet x 100 2x symbol Skull Bet x 3 5x symbol Motorbike Bet x 500 4x symbol Motorbike Bet x 250 3x symbol Motorbike Bet x 50 2x symbol Motorbike Bet x 2 5x symbol Gun or Handkerchief Bet x 250 4x symbol Dagger or Shield Bet x 100 3x symbol Dagger or Shield Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5

28.7. The additional function Super Bet increases the chances to line up the symbols Wild Judge Dredd. In order to use this function the player must push the button Superbet and to select one of the following options: a) to increase the chances to line up the symbols Wild Judge Dredd in reels 2, 3 and 4 (the minimum Bet is €0.35 (thirty-five euro cents)); a) to increase the chances to line up the symbols Wild Judge Dredd in all five reels (the minimum Bet is €0.50 (fifty euro cents)). 28.7.1. If the function Super Bet is not chosen, the symbol Wild Judge Dredd may come up only in reel 3 (the minimum Bet is €0.25 (twenty-five euro cents)). 28.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the

previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Wolfpack Pays 29. Wolfpack Pays is a game of 5 reels, 243 variants the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination of symbols. 29.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols which are calculated from the left to the right. 29.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.40 (forty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 80 (eighty euros). 29.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 29.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet selected by the player by 40, and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.40 €0.02 €0.80 €0.05 €2.00 €0.10 €4.00 €0.20 €8.00 €0.25 €10.00 €0.50 €20.00 €1.00 €40.00 €2.00 €80.00

29.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Substitutes any other symbol, and helps to Symbol Wild Wolf make a winning combination of symbols. 5x symbol Wild Wolf Bet x 800 4x symbol Wild Wolf Bet x 25 3x symbol Wild Wolf Bet x 10

5x symbol Howling Wolf Bet x 400 4x symbol Howling Wolf Bet x 20 3x symbol Howling Wolf Bet x 5 5x symbol Owl Bet x 250 4x symbol Owl Bet x 15 3x symbol Owl Bet x 5 5x symbol Heart Bet x 40 4x symbol Heart Bet x 5 3x symbol Heart Bet x 2 5x symbol Drum Bet x 40 4x symbol Drum Bet x 5 3x symbol Drum Bet x 2 5x symbol Cross Bet x 25 4x symbol Cross Bet x 5 3x symbol Cross Bet x 2 5x symbol Wine Bet x 25 4x symbol Wine Bet x 5 3x symbol Wine Bet x 2

29.6. Each time when a winning combination of symbols is lined up, the player wins one additional spin as well. After one win, during the additional spin, the chances for the symbol Wild Wolf to come up increase in reel 3. After two successive wins, the chances for the symbol Wild Wolf to come up increase in reels 2, 3 and 4. After three successive wins, the chances for the symbol Wild Wolf to come up increase in all five reels. 29.7. After four successive wins the player wins additional spins which end when the player fails three times (during three spins). When the additional spins begin, three coins representing the remaining additional spins emerge: upon each failure in an additional spin, one of the coins disappears. When all three coins disappear, the additional spins end. 5 (five) additional symbols Wild Wolf come up in the gaming reels during the additional spins; this increases the chances to line up a winning combination of symbols. 29.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Psycho

30. Psycho is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 30.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter House for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 30.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 30.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the

button Spin. 30.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.25 €0.02 €0.50 €0.05 €1.25 €0.10 €2.50 €0.20 €5.00 €0.25 €6.25 €0.50 €12.50 €1.00 €25.00 €2.00 €50.00

30.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

30.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter House, and helps to make a winning Symbol Wild combination of symbols. All winnings for the collected Wild combination of symbols are multiplied by 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 or 20. 5x symbol Wild Bet x 1250 4x symbol Wild Bet x 250 3x symbol Wild Bet x 25 2x symbol Wild Bet x 2 Bet x 2500 and 10, 15 or 20 additional spins. All winnings for the collected Wild 5x symbol Scatter House combination of symbols are multiplied by 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20 or 40. Bet x 375 and 10, 15 or 20 additional spins. All winnings for the collected Wild 4x symbol Scatter House combination of symbols are multiplied by 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20 or 40. Bet x 50 and 10, 15 or 20 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter House winnings for the collected Wild combination of symbols are multiplied by 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20 or 40. 2x symbol Scatter House Bet x 25 5x symbol Picture of a Woman Bet x 1000 4x symbol Picture of a Woman Bet x 200 3x symbol Picture of a Woman Bet x 25 2x symbol Picture of a Woman Bet x 1 5x symbol Picture of a Man Bet x 250 4x symbol Picture of a Man Bet x 100 3x symbol Picture of a Man Bet x 20 2x symbol Picture of a Man Bet x 1 5x symbol Looking Eye or Spider with Bet x 200 Money 4x symbol Looking Eye or Spider with Bet x 50 Money 3x symbol Looking Eye or Spider with Bet x 15 Money 5x symbol Key Bet x 150

4x symbol Key Bet x 30 3x symbol Key Bet x 10 5x symbol A Bet x 150 4x symbol A Bet x 30 3x symbol A Bet x 10 5x symbol K or Q Bet x 125 4x symbol K or Q Bet x 25 3x symbol K or Q Bet x 5 5x symbol J or 10 Bet x 100 4x symbol J or 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol J or 10 Bet x 5

30.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions

described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game. Robin Hood Prince of Tweets 31. Robin Hood Prince of Tweets is a game of 5 reels, 40 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 31.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Castle for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 31.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 31.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. In addition, the player may also choose the additional game function Super Bet. 31.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet selected by the player by 20, and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.20 €0.02 €0.40

€0.05 €1.00 €0.10 €2.00 €0.20 €4.00 €0.25 €5.00 €0.50 €10.00 €1.00 €20.00 €2.00 €40.00

31.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

31.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Castle, and helps to make a winning Symbol Wild Robin Hood combination of symbols. May come up only in the third reel. May turn the symbols next to it to the symbol Wild Robin Hood. 5x symbol Wild Robin Hood Bet x 250 4x symbol Wild Robin Hood Bet x 125 3x symbol Wild Robin Hood Bet x 50 2x symbol Wild Robin Hood Bet x 4 5x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 4000 and 15, 20 or 25 additional spins.

4x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 600 and 15, 20 or 25 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Castle Bet x 160 and 15, 20 or 25 additional spins. 5x symbol Princess Owl Bet x 200 4x symbol Princess Owl Bet x 100 3x symbol Princess Owl Bet x 25 2x symbol Princess Owl Bet x 2 5x symbol Owl with a Mug Bet x 150 4x symbol Owl with a Mug Bet x 60 3x symbol Owl with a Mug Bet x 12 2x symbol Owl with a Mug Bet x 2 5x symbol Basket with Golden Coins or Bet x 75 Target with Arrows 4x symbol Basket with Golden Coins or Bet x 25 Target with Arrows 3x symbol Basket with Golden Coins or Bet x 10 Target with Arrows 5x symbol Bow with Arrows or Sheet of Bet x 60 Paper 4x symbol Bow with Arrows or Sheet of Bet x 20 Paper 3x symbol Bow with Arrows or Sheet of Bet x 5 Paper 5x symbol A or K Bet x 50 4x symbol A or K Bet x 15 3x symbol A or K Bet x 3 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 35 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 12 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 2 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 25 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 1

31.7. The additional function Super Bet increases the chances to line up a combination of winning symbols. In order to use this function the player must push the button Superbet and to select one of the following options: a) to increase the chances to turn the symbols Princess Owl, Owl with a Mug, and Basket with Golden Coins into the symbol Wild Robin Hood (the minimum Bet is €0.30 (thirty euro cents)); b) to increase the chances to turn the symbols Princess Owl, Owl with a Mug, and Basket with Golden Coins,

Target with Golden Coins, Target with Arrows and Sheet of Paper into the symbol Wild Robin Hood (the minimum Bet is €0.80 (eighty euro cents)); 31.7.1. If the function Super Bet is not chosen only the symbol Princess Owl may be turned into the symbol Wild Robin Hood. 31.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. The Spin Lab 32. The Spin Lab is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 32.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 32.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.40 (forty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 80 (eighty euros). 32.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin. 32.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the Bet selected by the player by 40, and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.40 €0.02 €0.80 €0.05 €2.00 €0.10 €4.00 €0.20 €8.00 €0.25 €10.00 €0.50 €20.00 €1.00 €40.00 €2.00 €80.00

32.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

32.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter, Symbol Wild and helps to make a winning combination of symbols. 5x symbol Wild Bet x 1000 4x symbol Wild Bet x 200 3x symbol Wild Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Bet x 20 5x symbol Scatter Bet x 625 and 5 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Bet x 250 and 5 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Bet x 100 and 5 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Bet x 50 5x symbol Cube Bet x 800 4x symbol Cube Bet x 100 3x symbol Cube Bet x 50 5x symbol Purple Atom Bet x 600 4x symbol Purple Atom Bet x 80 3x symbol Purple Atom Bet x 40 5x symbol Yellow Molecule Bet x 500 4x symbol Yellow Molecule Bet x 50

3x symbol Yellow Molecule Bet x 30 5x symbol DNR Molecule Bet x 400 4x symbol DNR Molecule Bet x 50 3x symbol DNR Molecule Bet x 30 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 40 3x symbol A or K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 100 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 20 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10

32.7. Where three or more symbols Scatter come up in the gaming reels, the function Spin Lab Bonus opens for the player, and he/she wins 5 (five additional games. Before starting to play the additional games, the player has the option to choose 3 additional features – one feature out of the three lines displayed on the screen: 32.7.1. Row 1: the player may choose one of the following features which will be used in the additional

games: 32.7.1.1. Symbols the same. One of the symbols is chosen randomly: Cube, Purple Atom, Yellow Molecule or DNR Molecule. All symbols – Cube, Purple Atom, Yellow Molecule or DNR Molecule – turn into a selected symbol in additional games. 32.7.1.2. Symbols stacked. One of the symbols is chosen randomly: Cube, Purple Atom, Yellow Molecule or DNR Molecule. The number of symbols coming up in each gaming reel is higher than usual, and this increases the chances to collect the winning combination of these symbols. 32.7.1.3. Symbol prizes One of the symbols is chosen randomly: Cube, Purple Atom, Yellow Molecule or DNR Molecule. An additional winning is received for each selected symbol collected in the additional games; the amount of the winning is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 50 or 25. 32.7.2. Row 2: the player may choose one of the following features which will be used in the additional games: 32.7.2.1. Symbols Wild Stacked. Each symbol Wild that comes up remains at its place, while the other reels keep spinning during the additional games. 32.7.2.2. Extra Wilds. More symbols Wild come up in all gaming reels. 32.7.2.3. Wild Multiplier. When a combination of symbols Wild is collected, each winning is multiplied by 2, 3, 4, 5 or 10. 32.7.3. Row 3: the player may choose one of the following features which will be used in the additional games: 32.7.3.1. All Wins Multiplier: All winnings are multiplied by 2.

32.7.3.2. Pays Both Ways. All winnings are paid for the symbols that are in one winning row from the left to the right. 32.7.3.3. Extra 5 Games. Additional 5 respins are granted. 32.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Casinomeister 33. Casinomeister is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 33.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Robot for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 33.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 33.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 33.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 33.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

33.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Robot Total Bet x 100 4x symbol Scatter Robot Total Bet x 20 3x symbol Scatter Robot Total Bet x 5

2x symbol Scatter Robot Total Bet x 1 5x symbol Casino Meister Bet x 1500 4x symbol Casino Meister Bet x 250 3x symbol Casino Meister Bet x 25 2x symbol Casino Meister Bet x 3 5x symbol Medal Bet x 500 4x symbol Medal Bet x 100 3x symbol Medal Bet x 20 2x symbol Medal Bet x 3 5x symbol No Rogue or Beer Mug Bet x 300 4x symbol No Rogue or Beer Mug Bet x 50 3x symbol No Rogue or Beer Mug Bet x 15 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 30 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Robot, Pig and Incarcerated Pig, and helps the player to make one or several above- Symbol Wild Caricature mentioned combinations. The winning for the combination in which the symbols Wild Caricature substitutes another symbol is doubled. 5x symbol Wild Caricature Bet x 10000

4x symbol Wild Caricature Bet x 2000 3x symbol Wild Caricature Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Caricature Bet x 10

33.7. Casinomeister Feature. If the player collects 3 or more symbols Scatter Robot, unlimited additional spins with triple winnings are granted.. Where the symbol Pig comes up during the additional spins, 5 additional spins are left for the player. If during these five additional spins the symbol Incarcerated Pig comes up, the unlimited additional spins resume and are continues until the symbol Incarcerated Pig does not come up. 33.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. 1Can 2 Can 34. 1Can 2 Can is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the purpose of which is to spin with a winning combination. 34.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 34.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 34.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 34.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 34.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

34.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 50 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 5 and 10 additional spins. 5x symbol Animal Bet x 500 4x symbol Animal Bet x 100 3x symbol Animal Bet x 25 2x symbol Animal Bet x 5 5x symbol Lizard Bet x 250 4x symbol Lizard Bet x 100 3x symbol Lizard Bet x 25 5x symbol Feathers or Flowers Bet x 125 4x symbol Feathers or Flowers Bet x 50 3x symbol Feathers or Flowers Bet x 10 5x symbol A or K Bet x 100 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 5 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 75 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter, Symbol Wild and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Bet x 1000 4x symbol Wild Bet x 200 3x symbol Wild Bet x 50 2x symbol Wild Bet x 10

34.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player

fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. 300 Shields 35. 300 Shields is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 35.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Shield for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 35.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 5 (five euros). 35.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 35.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 35.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

35.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Shield Total Bet x 100 4x symbol Scatter Shield Total Bet x 12 3x symbol Scatter Shield Total Bet x 5

2x symbol Scatter Shield Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Shooting Warrior or Ship Bet x 250 4x symbol Shooting Warrior or Ship Bet x 100 3x symbol Shooting Warrior or Ship Bet x 15 2x symbol Shooting Warrior or Ship Bet x 2 5x symbol Dagger or Arrows Bet x 200 4x symbol Dagger or Arrows Bet x 20 3x symbol Dagger or Arrows Bet x 12 5x symbol A or K Bet x 150 4x symbol A or K Bet x 15 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 125 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 12 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 4 Replaces any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Horse Shield and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Horse Bet x 1000 5x symbol Wild Warrior Bet x 250 3x symbol Wild Warrior Bet x 25 2x symbol Wild Warrior Bet x 5

35.7. Additional spins. When 3 or more symbols Scatter Shield are collected, the player wins 5 additional spins. The winnings of the additional spins with the symbol Wild Warrior are doubled. When 2 or more symbols Shield are collected in the additional spins, the player is granted the second series of 5 additional spins the winnings of which with the symbol Wild Warrior are multiplied by 5. When 6 or more symbols Shield are collected in the additional spins, the player is granted the third series of 5 additional spins the winnings of which with the symbol Wild Warrior are multiplied by 25. When 12 or more symbols Shield are collected in the additional spins, the player is granted the fourth series of 5 additional spins the winnings of which with the symbol Wild Warrior are multiplied by 300. 35.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Doctor Love 36. Doctor Love is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 36.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Love Meter for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 36.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 36.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 36.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 36.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

36.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 20 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Love Meter winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 15 and 15 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Love Meter winnings in the additional spins are tripled.

Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Love Meter winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Love Meter Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Nurse Bet x 1500

4x symbol Nurse Bet x 500 3x symbol Nurse Bet x 60 2x symbol Nurse Bet x 5 5x symbol Patient Bet x 750 4x symbol Patient Bet x 250 3x symbol Patient Bet x 50 2x symbol Patient Bet x 4 5x symbol Bear or Ambulance Bet x 400 4x symbol Bear or Ambulance Bet x 100 3x symbol Bear or Ambulance Bet x 20 5x symbol Flowers or Watch Bet x 200 4x symbol Flowers or Watch Bet x 75 3x symbol Flowers or Watch Bet x 15 5x symbol Cardiogram or Crutches Bet x 150 4x symbol Cardiogram or Crutches Bet x 50 3x symbol Cardiogram or Crutches Bet x 10 5x symbol Stethoscope or Medicine Bet x 100 4x symbol Stethoscope or Medicine Bet x 20 3x symbol Stethoscope or Medicine Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Love Meter, and helps the player to make Symbol Wild Doctor one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 10 1x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 2

36.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Doctor Love on Vacation 37. Doctor Love on Vacation is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines, the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 37.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Surfboard for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 37.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 37.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 37.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 37.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

37.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 20 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Surfboard winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 15 and 16 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Surfboard winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 5 and 12 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Surfboard winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Surfboard Total Bet x 2

5x symbol Nurse Bet x 1000 4x symbol Nurse Bet x 200 3x symbol Nurse Bet x 25 2x symbol Nurse Bet x 3 5x symbol Sunburnt Holidaymaker Bet x 250 4x symbol Sunburnt Holidaymaker Bet x 100 3x symbol Sunburnt Holidaymaker Bet x 20 2x symbol Sunburnt Holidaymaker Bet x 3 5x symbol Turtle or Airplane Bet x 200 4x symbol Turtle or Airplane Bet x 50 3x symbol Turtle or Airplane Bet x 15 5x symbol Stethoscopes or Cocktail Bet x 100

4x symbol Stethoscopes or Cocktail Bet x 20 3x symbol Stethoscopes or Cocktail Bet x 5 5x symbol Heart or Ball Bet x 150 4x symbol Heart or Ball Bet x 30 3x symbol Heart or Ball Bet x 10 5x symbol Suitcase or Sunbed Bet x 125 4x symbol Suitcase or Sunbed Bet x 25 3x symbol Suitcase or Sunbed Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Surfboard, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. Symbol Wild Doctor The winning for the combination in which the symbols Wild Doctor substitutes another symbol is doubled. 5x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Doctor Bet x 10

37.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Eastern Dragon 38. Eastern Dragon is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 38.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 38.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 38.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 38.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 38.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

38.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 200 4x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 20 3x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 5 2x symbol Scatter Total Bet x 1 5x symbol Fish Bet x 3000 4x symbol Fish Bet x 300 3x symbol Fish Bet x 100 2x symbol Fish Bet x 10

5x symbol Lighting Bet x 1000 4x symbol Lighting Bet x 200 3x symbol Lighting Bet x 50 2x symbol Lighting Bet x 5 5x symbol Lotus or Fireworks Bet x 500 4x symbol Lotus or Fireworks Bet x 100 3x symbol Lotus or Fireworks Bet x 15 2x symbol Lotus or Fireworks Bet x 2 5x symbol A or K Bet x 300 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 200 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 30 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 25 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter, Symbol Wild Dragon and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 1x Symbol Wild Dragon Bet x 2 15 additional spins. All winnings in the 2x symbol Wild Dragon that comes up in additional spins are tripled. Winnings of the first and fifth reel. additional spins which include the symbol Wild Dragon are multiplied by 6.

38.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with

an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. The Snake Charmer

39. The Snake Charmer is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 39.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Sorcerer for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 39.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 39.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 39.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 39.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

39.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Sorcerer Total Bet x 100 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Sorcerer Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Sorcerer Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Sorcerer Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Woman Bet x 1500 4x symbol Woman Bet x 500 3x symbol Woman Bet x 60 2x symbol Woman Bet x 5 5x symbol Elephant Bet x 750

4x symbol Elephant Bet x 250 3x symbol Elephant Bet x 50 2x symbol Elephant Bet x 4 5x symbol Fife or Snake Bag Bet x 400 4x symbol Fife or Snake Bag Bet x 100 3x symbol Fife or Snake Bag Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 75 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 50 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Snake Sorcerer, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Snake Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Snake Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Snake Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Snake Bet x 10

39.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Genie Wild

40. Genie Wild is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 40.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Bottle for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 40.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros).

40.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 40.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 40.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

40.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Bottle Total Bet x 100 and 10 additional spins. 4x symbol Scatter Bottle Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins. 3x symbol Scatter Bottle Total Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Bottle Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Monkey Bet x 1500 4x symbol Monkey Bet x 500 3x symbol Monkey Bet x 60 2x symbol Monkey Bet x 5 5x symbol Gold Chest Bet x 750

4x symbol Gold Chest Bet x 250 3x symbol Gold Chest Bet x 50 2x symbol Gold Chest Bet x 4 5x symbol Emerald or Fruit Bet x 400 4x symbol Emerald or Fruit Bet x 100 3x symbol Emerald or Fruit Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 75 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 50 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Jeannie Bottle, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Jeannie Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Jeannie Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Jeannie Bet x 200 2x symbol Wild Jeannie Bet x 10

40.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall out or, by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall out. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Gold Ahoy 41. Gold Ahoy is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 41.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Chest for which the winnings are paid in any sequence.

41.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 41.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 41.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 41.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

41.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Ship Bet x 10000 4x symbol Ship Bet x 750 3x symbol Ship Bet x 100 2x symbol Ship Bet x 5 5x symbol Pirate Flag Bet x 1000 4x symbol Pirate Flag Bet x 300 3x symbol Pirate Flag Bet x 50 2x symbol Pirate Flag Bet x 5 5x symbol Bottle or Dagger Bet x 500 4x symbol Bottle or Dagger Bet x 100 3x symbol Bottle or Dagger Bet x 25

5x symbol A or K Bet x 250 4x symbol A or K Bet x 50

3x symbol A or K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 30 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 25 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Up to 30 additional spins. All winnings in the 3x symbol Map in reels 2, 3 and 5 additional spins are multiplied by 4. Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Chest and Map, and helps the player to make Symbol Wild Pirate one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Pirate Bet x 25000 4x symbol Wild Pirate Bet x 5000 3x symbol Wild Pirate Bet x 250 2x symbol Wild Pirate Bet x 10

41.7. Chest bonus. When three or more symbols Scatter Chest come up in the gaming reels, the Chest Bonus opens for the player in which the player wins an additional winning by choosing one of the chests that emerge. 41.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Irish Eyes 42. Irish Eyes is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 42.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols which are calculated from the left to the right. 42.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 42.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 42.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

42.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

42.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 12 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Lady winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 20 and 12 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Lady winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 5 and 12 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Lady winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Lady Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Meadow Bet x 1250 4x symbol Meadow Bet x 500 3x symbol Meadow Bet x 50 2x symbol Meadow Bet x 6 5x symbol Gold Chest or Clover Bet x 500 4x symbol Gold Chest or Clover Bet x 175 3x symbol Gold Chest or Clover Bet x 25 2x symbol Gold Chest or Clover Bet x 3 5x symbol A or K Bet x 150

4x symbol A or K Bet x 50 3x symbol A or K Bet x 20 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 125 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 30 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Symbol Wild Elf Lady, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Elf Bet x 10000 5x symbol Wild Elf Bet x 1000 5x symbol Wild Elf Bet x 150

5x symbol Wild Elf Bet x 10 2x symbol Wild Elf Bet x 2

42.7. Pick and Win feature. When the symbols Wild Elf come up In the first and fifth reels, a bonus feature opens for the player in which the player may win a winning in the amount of the Bet multiplied up to 100 times by choosing one of the symbols Wild Elf. 42.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Ramesses Riches 43. Ramesses Riches is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 43.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Cross for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 43.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 43.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 43.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

43.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

43.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 20 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Cross winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 15 and 16 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Cross winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 5 and 12 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Cross winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Cross Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Lady Bet x 1000 4x symbol Lady Bet x 200 3x symbol Lady Bet x 25 2x symbol Lady Bet x 3 5x symbol Cat Bet x 250 4x symbol Cat Bet x 100 3x symbol Cat Bet x 20 2x symbol Cat Bet x 3 5x symbol Papyrus or Eye Bet x 200 4x symbol Papyrus or Eye Bet x 50 3x symbol Papyrus or Eye Bet x 15 5x symbol A or K Bet x 150 4x symbol A or K Bet x 30

3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 125 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Cross, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. Winnings for the combinations in which the Symbol Ramesses symbols Wild Ramesses substitutes another symbol, are doubled. Winnings of additional spins which include the symbol Wild Ramesses are multiplied by 6. 5x symbol Ramesses Bet x 5000 4x symbol Wild Ramesses Bet x 1000 3x symbol Wild Ramesses Bet x 100 2x symbol Wild Ramesses Bet x 10

43.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may

take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Emperor‘s Garden 44. Emperor‘s Garden is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 44.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Fish for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 44.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 44.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 44.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet:

44.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

44.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 10 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Fish winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 20 and 10 additional spins. All 4x symbol Scatter Fish winnings in the additional spins are tripled. Total Bet x 5 and 10 additional spins. All 3x symbol Scatter Fish winnings in the additional spins are tripled. 2x symbol Scatter Fish Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Emperor Bet x 5000 4x symbol Emperor Bet x 1000 3x symbol Emperor Bet x 50 2x symbol Emperor Bet x 3 5x symbol Statute Bet x 1000 4x symbol Statute Bet x 200 3x symbol Statute Bet x 30 2x symbol Statute Bet x 3 5x symbol Lily or House Bet x 500 5x symbol Lily or House Bet x 50

5x symbol Lily or House Bet x 25 5x symbol A or K Bet x 250 4x symbol A or K Bet x 30 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 25 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Fish, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels. Symbol Wild Garden When the symbol Wild Garden comes up in

the second, third and/or fourth reels, this symbol will include all the three positions in the reel in which it has come up. The winnings of the additional spins with the symbol Wild Garden are tripled.

44.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Call of the Colosseum 45. Call of the Colosseum is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 45.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Shield for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 45.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 45.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin.

45.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 45.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

45.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 5x symbol Scatter Shield Where the symbol Wild Emperor with thumbs up comes up in any position in the additional spins, the player wins 1 to 3 additional spins. Total Bet x 15 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 4x symbol Scatter Shield Where the symbol Wild Emperor with thumbs up comes up in any position in the additional spins the player wins 1 to 3 additional spins. Total Bet x 5 and 10 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 3x symbol Scatter Shield Where the symbol Wild Emperor with thumbs up comes up in any position in the additional spins the player wins 1 to 3 additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Shield Total Bet x 2 5x symbol Lady Bet x 5000 4x symbol Lady Bet x 500

3x symbol Lady Bet x 50 2x symbol Lady Bet x 5 5x symbol Lion Bet x 2000 4x symbol Lion Bet x 200 3x symbol Lion Bet x 20 2x symbol Lion Bet x 2 5x symbol Coliseum or Carriage Bet x 200 4x symbol Coliseum or Carriage Bet x 25 3x symbol Coliseum or Carriage Bet x 15 5x symbol Shield or Armour Bet x 150 4x symbol Shield or Armour Bet x 15 3x symbol Shield or Armour Bet x 10 5x symbol Bag or Shoes Bet x 150 4x symbol Bag or Shoes Bet x 10 3x symbol Bag or Shoes Bet x 5 5x symbol Coins or Grapes Bet x 100 4x symbol Coins or Grapes Bet x 10 3x symbol Coins or Grapes Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Shield and helps the player to make one or Symbol Wild Emperor several above-mentioned combinations.

The symbols may come up only in the second, third and fourth reels.

45.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Dragon Drop 46. Dragon Drop is a game of 5 reels, 25 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination.

46.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Egg for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 46.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 46.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 25 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 46.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 46.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

46.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 100 and 8 additional spins. All 5x symbol Scatter Egg winnings in the additional spins are doubled. Where the symbol Wild Dragon comes up in

the additional spin, it stays in its place during the rest of the additional spins. Total Bet x 20 and 8 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 4x symbol Scatter Egg Where the symbol Wild Dragon comes up in the additional spin, it stays in its place during the rest of the additional spins. Total Bet x 5 and 8 additional spins. All winnings in the additional spins are doubled. 3x symbol Scatter Egg Where the symbol Wild Dragon comes up in the additional spin, it stays in its place during the rest of the additional spins. 2x symbol Scatter Egg Total Bet x 2

5x symbol Chest Bet x 5000 4x symbol Chest Bet x 100 3x symbol Chest Bet x 50 2x symbol Chest Bet x 2 5x symbol Castle Bet x 500 4x symbol Castle Bet x 50 3x symbol Castle Bet x 25 5x symbol Warrior or Sheep Bet x 250 4x symbol Warrior or Sheep Bet x 25 3x symbol Warrior or Sheep Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 200 4x symbol A or K Bet x 20 3x symbol A or K Bet x 15 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 150 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 15 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 10 5x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 100 4x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 10 3x symbol 10 or 9 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Egg, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. The symbols may come up only in the Symbol Wild Dragon second, third and fourth reels. Winnings for the combinations in which the symbols Wild Dragon substitutes another symbol, are doubled.

46.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Wild West 47. Wild West is a game of 5 reels, 10 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 47.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Chips for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 47.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 20 (twenty euros). 47.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet and to push the button Spin. 47.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of game Lines the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet. Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.10 €0.02 €0.20 €0.05 €0.50 €0.10 €1.00 €0.20 €2.00 €0.25 €2.50 €0.50 €5.00 €1.00 €10.00 €2.00 €20.00

47.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

47.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

5x symbol Lady Bet x 1000 4x symbol Lady Bet x 200

3x symbol Lady Bet x 50 2x symbol Lady Bet x 5 5x symbol Horse Bet x 200 4x symbol Horse Bet x 120 3x symbol Horse Bet x 40 2x symbol Horse Bet x 5 5x symbol Inn Bet x 150 4x symbol Inn Bet x 80 3x symbol Inn Bet x 30 5x symbol Money Sac Bet x 150 4x symbol Money Sac Bet x 80 3x symbol Money Sac Bet x 30 5x symbol Carafe with Glasses Bet x 100 4x symbol Carafe with Glasses Bet x 40 3x symbol Carafe with Glasses Bet x 10 5x symbol Shoes Bet x 100 4x symbol Shoes Bet x 40 3x symbol Shoes Bet x 10 5x symbol Cards Case Bet x 100 4x symbol Cards Case Bet x 40 3x symbol Cards Case Bet x 10 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Chips, and helps the player to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. May Symbol Wild Cowboy come up only in the third, fourth and fifth

reels. Where a lucky combination with the symbol Wild Cowboy is collected, the player wins 5 additional spins. May come up only during the additional spins. Where the symbol comes up in the additional Symbol Scatter Chips spin, it repeats the winning won before the additional spin.

47.7. The additional function Super Bet provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 2 or 5 times if the symbol Wild Cowboy opens in the winning combination:

47.7.1. The additional function Super Bet x2 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 2 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 20. 47.7.2. The additional function Super Bet x5 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 5 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 50. 47.8. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. Extra Cash 48. Extra Cash is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 48.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 48.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 10 (ten euros). 48.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 50 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 48.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 48.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

48.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

5x symbol Scatter Newspaper Total Bet x 50 and 20 additional spins. Total Bet x 5 and 12 additional spins. The symbol Wild Newspaper that comes up in the 4x symbol Scatter Newspaper main spin stays in its place during the additional spin. Total Bet x 2 and 8 additional spins. The symbol Wild Newspaper that comes up in the 3x symbol Scatter Newspaper main spin stays in its place during the additional spin. 5x symbol Car Bet x 400 4x symbol Car Bet x 75 3x symbol Car Bet x 25 2x symbol Car Bet x 5 5x symbol Dog Bet x 300

4x symbol Dog Bet x 75 3x symbol Dog Bet x 25 2x symbol Dog Bet x 5 5x symbol News-stand Bet x 250 4x symbol News-stand Bet x 50 3x symbol News-stand Bet x 25 5x symbol Newspapers in Trolley Bet x 200 4x symbol Newspapers in Trolley Bet x 50 3x symbol Newspapers in Trolley Bet x 20 5x symbol Pile of Newspapers Bet x 200 4x symbol Pile of Newspapers Bet x 50 3x symbol Pile of Newspapers Bet x 20 5x symbol A Bet x 150 4x symbol A Bet x 25 3x symbol A Bet x 10 5x symbol K or Q Bet x 100 4x symbol K or Q Bet x 20 3x symbol K or Q Bet x 10 5x symbol J or 10 Bet x 100 4x symbol J or 10 Bet x 15

3x symbol J or 10 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Newspaper, and helps the player to make Symbol Newspaper one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Newspaper Bet x 500 4x symbol Wild Newspaper Bet x 100 3x symbol Wild Newspaper Bet x 50 2x symbol Wild Newspaper Bet x 10

48.7. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols. A While on The Nile 49. A While on The Nile is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 49.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbol Scatter Emerald for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 49.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum Bet is EUR 10 (ten euros). 49.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. 49.4. The amount of the Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines (fifty) by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 49.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

49.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Total Bet x 2 and 5 additional spins. Symbol 3x symbol Scatter Emerald Scatter Emerald may come up only in reels 2, 3 and 4. 5x symbol Lady Bet x 1000 4x symbol Lady Bet x 100 3x symbol Lady Bet x 25 5x symbol Eye Bet x 300 4x symbol Eye Bet x 100 3x symbol Eye Bet x 25 5x symbol Picture Bet x 200 4x symbol Picture Bet x 50 3x symbol Picture Bet x 20 5x symbol Stick Bet x 200 4x symbol Stick Bet x 50 3x symbol Stick Bet x 20 5x symbol A Bet x 100 4x symbol A Bet x 25 3x symbol A Bet x 10 5x symbol K Bet x 100 4x symbol K Bet x 25

3x symbol K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q Bet x 75 4x symbol Q Bet x 20 3x symbol Q Bet x 5 5x symbol J Bet x 75 4x symbol J Bet x 20 3x symbol J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Emerald and Scatter Scarab, and helps the Symbol Wild Pharaoh player to make one or several above- mentioned combinations. May come up only in reels 2, 3 and 4.

49.7. Scarab Bonus Feature. When three symbols Scatter Scarab are lined up in the game reels, the player is opened a bonus feature in which the player must choose the scarabs coming up until the sign Collect emerges. All winnings are multiplied by the Bet.. The symbol Scatter Scarab may come up only in reels 1, 3 and 5. 49.8. The additional function Super Bet provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning from 2 to 10 times if the symbol Wild Pharaoh opens in the winning combination: 49.8.1. The additional function Super Bet x2 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 2 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 50. 49.8.2. The additional function Super Bet x4 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 4 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 100. 49.8.3. The additional function Super Bet x6 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 6 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 200. 49.8.4. The additional function Super Bet x8 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 8 times. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 250. 49.8.5. The additional function Super Bet x10 provides the player with an opportunity to increase his/her winning 10 times. The Total Bet that has to be placed in order to switch on the additional function Super Bet x 10 is calculated by multiplying the Bet by 300. 49.9. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols.

Joker Jester 50. Joker Jester is a game of 5 reels, 20 lines, the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. 50.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Balls, Barrel and Basket, for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 50.2. The minimum Bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum Bet is EUR 40 (forty euros). 50.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the Bet, to select 1 to 20 Lines, and to push the button Spin. 50.4. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: 50.5. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

50.6. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Scatter Balls Total Bet x 100 4x symbol Scatter Balls Total Bet x 10 3x symbol Scatter Balls Total Bet x 5 2x symbol Scatter Balls Total Bet x 1 5x symbol Castle Bet x 400 4x symbol Castle Bet x 75 3x symbol Castle Bet x 25 2x symbol Castle Bet x 3 5x symbol Guitar Bet x 250 4x symbol Guitar Bet x 30 3x symbol Guitar Bet x 20 2x symbol Guitar Bet x 2 5x symbol A Bet x 150

4x symbol A Bet x 25 3x symbol A Bet x 15 5x symbol K Bet x 125 4x symbol K Bet x 25 3x symbol K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q Bet x 115 4x symbol Q Bet x 20 3x symbol Q Bet x 8 5x symbol J or 10 Bet x 100

4x symbol J or 10 Bet x 15 3x symbol J or 10 Bet x 4 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Balls, Barrel and Basket, and helps the player Symbol Wild Jester to make one or several above-mentioned combinations. 5x symbol Wild Jester Bet x 500 4x symbol Wild Jester Bet x 300 3x symbol Wild Jester Bet x 150 2x symbol Wild Jester Bet x 10

50.7. Juggle Bonus opens for the player when the symbol Basket comes up in reels 1, 2 and 3. The Jester starts juggling three eggs, and in order to increase the winning, the player must push the button Add Egg. The more eggs the Jester juggles, the bigger the winning will be. The bonus game ends when the Jester drops an egg. In order to keep the collected winning, the player may choose to collect it (Take Win). Juggle Bonus winnings are multiplied by the Bet amount. 50.8. Jester Wild Feature is provided randomly after any spin: The Jester is jumping over the game reels turning certain symbols into the symbol Wild Jester and the winning is recalculated. 50.9. Barrel Bonus Feature opens for the player when the symbol Barrel comes up in reels 3, 4 and 5. The player may select the barrels that have come up hiding different winnings until the Jester comes up. All Barrel Bonus Feature winnings are multiplied by the Bet amount. 50.10. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning awarded for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols.

Merlin‘s Magic Respins 51. Merlin‘s Magic Respins is a game of 5 reels, 50 lines the goal of which is to spin with a winning combination. The game has the additional function Super Bet. 51.1. All winnings are paid for the symbols calculated from the left to the right, except the symbols Scatter Cauldron for which the winnings are paid in any sequence. 50.2. The minimum Bet is €0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum Bet is €700 (seven hundred euros). 51.3. In order to participate in the game, the player must choose the amount of the Bet, and to push the button Spin; in addition, he/she may choose the additional game function Super Bet. 51.3.1. The Total Bet is calculated by multiplying the number of Lines by the Bet and is displayed in the field Total Bet: Bet Total Bet €0.01 €0.50 €0.02 €1.00 €0.05 €2.50 €0.10 €5.00 €0.20 €10.00 €0.25 €12.50 €0.50 €25.00 €1.00 €50.00 €2.00 €100.00

51.3.2. The additional function Super Bet provides the player with an opportunity to win the Wild Respins Feature and increases the chances to spin the symbols Wild Merlin. 51.3.2.1. The additional function Super Bet x1 provides the player with an opportunity to win the Feature of 1 Wild Respin. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 100. 51.3.2.2. The additional function Super Bet x2 provides the player with an opportunity to win the feature of 2 Wild Respins. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 150. 51.3.2.3. The additional function Super Bet x3 provides the player with an opportunity to win 3 Wild Respins Features. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 250. 51.3.2.4. The additional function Super Bet x4 provides the player with an opportunity to win the feature of 4 Wild Respins. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 300. 51.3.2.5. The additional function Super Bet x5 provides the player with an opportunity to win the feature of 5 Wild Respins. The Total Bet amount is calculated by multiplying the Bet amount by 350.

51.3.2.6. If this function is chosen, the symbol Wild Merlin may come up in all reels. 51.3.2.7. If this feature is selected and 4 symbols Wild Merlin come up in at least one reel, these symbols remain at their places during all respins, offering the player the possibility to increase his/her winning. 51.3.2.8. All additional spins are played in the same lines and bets as chosen in the main spin which determined the additional spin. 51.4. The winnings shall be paid for the symbols which are in the Payline:

51.5. Winning combinations: Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5x symbol Cup Bet x 500 4x symbol Cup Bet x 100 3x symbol Cup Bet x 25 5x symbol Book Bet x 300

4x symbol Book Bet x 100 3x symbol Book Bet x 25 5x symbol Telescope or Letter Bet x 200 4x symbol Telescope or Letter Bet x 50 3x symbol Telescope or Letter Bet x 20 5x symbol A or K Bet x 100 4x symbol A or K Bet x 25 3x symbol A or K Bet x 10 5x symbol Q or J Bet x 75 4x symbol Q or J Bet x 20 3x symbol Q or J Bet x 5 5x symbol 10 Bet x 50 4x symbol 10 Bet x 20 3x symbol 10 Bet x 5 Substitutes any other symbol except Scatter Newspaper, and helps the player to make Symbol Wild Merlin one or several above-mentioned combinations. May come up only in reels 2,3 and 4. 5x symbol Wild Merlin Bet x 1000 4x symbol Wild Merlin Bet x 100 3x symbol Wild Merlin Bet x 25 Total Bet (without the amount of Super Bet) x 2 and 7 additional spins. The symbols may 3x symbol Scatter Cauldron come up only in the second, third and fourth reels.

51.6. Additional game. If at least one winning combination of symbols is collected, the player is provided with an opportunity to play an additional game (Gamble Feature) with the risk to lose the winning for the collected combination(s) of symbols or to increase the winning two or four times. The additional game is not mandatory and in order to play it, the player must push the displayed button Gamble. In the additional game, the player has to choose one of the colours of the card; by pushing the button RED/ BLACK, the player tries to guess the colour of the card that will fall, or by pushing the button Suit, the player tries to guess what suit of card – hearts, diamonds, clubs, spades – will fall. If the player is able to guess the colour of the card correctly, his/her winning for the previously collected combination(s) of symbols is multiplied by 2 (two), and if he/she is able to guess the suit, the winning is multiplied by 4 (four). The player who has won an additional game may take the winning by pushing the button Take Win or to play one more time under the same conditions described in this Clause. If the colour or the suit of the card is guessed correctly one more time, another additional game is granted. The total number of additional games granted may not exceed 5. If the player fails to guess the colour or suit of the card correctly, he/she loses the winning received for the combination(s) of symbols collected in the previous game.

Alice Adventure

112. Alice Adventure is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 112.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Cat”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 112.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 6 (six euros). 112.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.02, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 112.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 112.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

112.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Scatter Cat” Total bet x 25 4 x symbol “Scatter Cat” Total bet x 10 3 x symbol “Scatter Cat” Total bet x 5 Bet x 1000

5 x symbol

Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 120

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 120

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol

Bet x 10

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 4 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 4 Symbol “Wild Alice” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Cat” and “Bonus Bottle”, helping The symbols “Wild Alice x 2”, “Wild theThey player multiply to make the winning up one by or themore number of the Alice x 3”, and “Wild Alice x 5” aforementionedindicated in the symbol.combinations.

112.7. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Bottle”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they win 5 to 15 additional spins by choosing one of the doors that appear. If during the additional spins the reels reveal the symbol “Wild Reel”, it expands throughout the whole reel and, acting as the symbol “Wild Alice”, helps the player to make up winning combinations.

Illusions 2

113. Illusions 2 is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 113.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Illusions 2”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 113.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 6 (six euros). 113.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.02, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 113.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”.

113.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

113.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Scatter Illusions 2” Total bet x 25 4 x symbol “Scatter Illusions 2” Total bet x 10 3 x symbol “Scatter Illusions 2” Total bet x 5 Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol

Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 120

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 10

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 120 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 4 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 4 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Illusions 2”, “Bonus Magician”, and The symbols “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Trick”,They multiply helping the the winning player byto makethe number up one and “Wild x 5” orindicated more of in the the aforementioned symbol.

combinations.

113.7. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Magician”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they win 5 to 15 additional spins by choosing one of the tricks that appear. If 5 additional spins are chosen, their winnings will be multiplied by 6; if 8 additional spins are chosen, their winnings will be multiplied by 3; if 15 additional spins are chosen, their winnings will be multiplied by 1. If during the additional spins the reels reveal the symbol “Trick”, it expands throughout the whole reel and, acting as the symbol “Wild”, helps the player to make up winning combinations.

Best Things In Life

114. Best Things In Life is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 114.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Best Things In Life”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 114.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 75 (seventy-five euros). 114.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 114.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 114.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

114.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Scatter Best Things In Total bet x 15 and 20 additional spins Life” 4 x symbol “Scatter Best Things In Total bet x 10 and 15 additional spins Life” 3 x symbol “Scatter Best Things In Total bet x 5 and 10 additional spins Life” 2 x symbol “Scatter Best Things In 2 additional spins Life” 1 x symbol “Scatter Best Things In 1 additional spin Life” The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet 5 x symbol “Beach” Bet x 400 4 x symbol “Beach” is EUR 1: Bet x 40 3 x symbol “Beach” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Aeroplane” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Aeroplane” Bet x 20

3 x symbol “Aeroplane” Bet x 8 5 x symbol “Yacht” Bet x 40 4 x symbol “Yacht” Bet x 15 3 x symbol “Yacht” Bet x 4 5 x symbol “Car” Bet x 25 4 x symbol “Car” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “Car” Bet x 3 5 x symbol “Ring” Bet x 20 4 x symbol “Ring” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “Ring” Bet x 3 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 10 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 2 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 4 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 2 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 4 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 3 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 1 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 4 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 3 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 1 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 4 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 2 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 1 Symbol “Wild Coins” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Best Things In Life”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. Making up

a winning combination, the symbol “Wild NinjaCoins” Chef expands throughout the whole reel.

115. Ninja Chef is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination.

115.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Ninja Chef”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 115.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 6 (six euros). 115.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.2, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 115.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 115.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

115.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Scatter Ninja Chef” Total bet x 25 4 x symbol “Scatter Ninja Chef” Total bet x 10 additional spins

3 x symbol “Scatter Ninja Chef” Total bet x 5 Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 120

5 x symbol

Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 120

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 10

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 4 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 4 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Ninja Chef”, “Bonus Ninja”, and “Violent Ninja”, helping the player to The symbols “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, They multiply the winning by the number make up one or more of the and “Wild x 5” indicated in the symbol. aforementioned combinations.

115.7. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Ninja”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they win 5 to 15 additional spins by cutting the food. If 5 additional spins are won, their winnings will be multiplied by 6; if 8 additional spins are won, their winnings will be multiplied by 3; if 15 additional spins are won, their winnings will be multiplied by 1. During additional spins, the reels may reveal the symbol “Violent Ninja”, which covers the whole reel and replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Ninja Chef”, “Bonus Ninja”, and symbols “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, and “Wild x 5”.

Royal Cash

116. Royal Cash is a 5-reel, 50-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 116.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 116.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros).

116.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.2, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 50 and then press the button “Spin”. 116.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 116.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

116.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “King” Bet x 2000 4 x symbol “King” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “King” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “Queen” Bet x 1000 4 x symbol “Queen” Bet x 150 3 x symbol “Queen” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “Chest” Bet x 300 4 x symbol “Chest” Bet x 100 3 x symbol “Chest” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “Sacks” Bet x 200 4 x symbol “Sacks” Bet x 75 3 x symbol “Sacks” Bet x 40 5 x symbol “Jewels” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Jewels” Bet x 60 3 x symbol “Jewels” Bet x 30 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 50

4 x symbol “J” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 50 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 50 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Royal Cash” and the symbols “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Wild x 5”, and 5 x symbol “Wild” “WildBet x 2000x 10”, helping the player to make 4 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 200 up one or more of the aforementioned 3 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 50 The symbols “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, Theycombinations. multiply the winning by the number “Wild x 5”, and “Wild x 10” indicated in the symbol. They can appear 5 x symbol “Scatter Royal Cash” 36 to 50 additional spins (only when landed only on the fifth reel. together with one of the following symbols: “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Wild x 5”, and “Wild x 10”). The winnings of additional spins are 4 x symbol “Scatter Royal Cash” multiplied,26 to 35 additional respectively, spins by (only 2, 3, when 5, or landed10. together with one of the following symbols: “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Wild x 5”, and “Wild x 10”). The winnings of additional spins are 3 x symbol “Scatter Royal Cash” multiplied,16 to 25 additional respectively, spins by (only 2, 3, when 5, or lande10. d together with one of the following symbols: “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Wild x 5”, and “Wild x 10”). The winnings of additional spins are 2 x symbol “Scatter Royal Cash” multiplied,10 to 15 additional respectively, spins by (only 2, 3, when 5, or land10. ed together with one of the following symbols: “Wild x 2”, “Wild x 3”, “Wild x 5”, and “Wild x 10”). The winnings of additional spins are multiplied, respectively, by 2, 3, 5, or 10. Dolphin’s Island

117. Dolphin’s Island is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 117.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 117.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 117.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1.00, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 117.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

Bet x 20.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.80

3 x symbol Bet x 2.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

3 x symbol Bet x 2.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.12

Symbol “Wild Dolphin” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Dolphin” and “Bonus Wheel”, helping Symbol “Dolphin” the15 additionalplayer to spins.make upIt can one appear or more only of theon theaforementioned third reel. During combinations. the additional spins, symbols “Wild Dolphin” can appear on the gaming reels at random.

117.5. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Wheel”, the player is offered a bonus game, where, by spinning the wheel, they can win an amount equal to the amount of bet multiplied by up to 100 and the multiplication of the winning of the next spin by up to 10. If the player wins more than one multiplication of the win, only the bigger multiplier will be applied. The player can spin the wheel as many times as the number of the symbols they have landed.

Happy Birds

118. Happy Birds is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 118.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 118.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 118.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1.00, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 118.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 16.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.80

3 x symbol Bet x 4.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol

Bet x 0.40

3 x symbol

Bet x 2.80

Bet x 1.60 5 x symbol

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

5 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.20 3 x symbol 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.80 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.80 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.12 Symbol “Wild Flying Parrot” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Magic Bow” and “Bonus Birds”, helping 2 x symbol “Magic Bow” theAdditional player tospins make (their up numberone or more is assigned of the (landed on the second and aforementionedat random). During combinations. the additional spins, fourth reel) one or more symbols can be turned into the symbol “Wild Flying Parrot” at random.

118.5. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Birds”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win some money or multiplication of the winning by shooting at targets.

119. 24 is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 119.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 119.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 119.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1.00, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”.

119.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 12.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol

3 x symbol Bet x 6.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.40

4 x symbol Bet x 0.80

3 x symbol Bet x 2.80

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.20 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.20 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1.20 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.12

Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Free Spins” and “Bonus 24”, helping Symbol “Free Spins” the10 additionalplayer to makespins. up It canone appear or more of theonly aforementioned on the third reel. combinations.

119.5. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus 24”, the player is offered a bonus game, where, by detonating the explosive, they can win a winning equal to the amount of bet multiplied by up to 100 and the multiplication of the winning by up to 10.

Heavy Metal Warriors

120. Heavy Metal Warriors is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 120.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 120.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.40 (forty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 200 (two hundred euros). 120.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1.00, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 120.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 2:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 50.00

5 x symbol Bet x 5.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.00

3 x symbol Bet x 0.20

2 x symbol Bet x 25.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.50

4 x symbol

Bet x 0.75

3 x symbol

Bet x 0.25

2 x symbol Bet x 10.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.50

3 x symbol Bet x 0.10

2 x symbol Bet x 0.50

5 x symbol Bet x 1.50

4 x symbol Bet x 0.35

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 4.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.35 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 3.75 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.25 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.75 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.25 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 2.00 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.15 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 1.25 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.15 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Bonus Heavy Metal”, helping the player 5 x symbol “Bonus Heavy Metal” toBet make x 40.00 up oneand or10 more to 30 ofadditional the spins aforementioned combinations.

4 x symbol “Bonus Heavy Metal” Bet x 20.00 and 10 to 30 additional spins

3 x symbol “Bonus Heavy Metal” Bet x 10.00 and 10 to 30 additional spins

The Warriors

121. The Warriors is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 121.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 121.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 25 (twenty-five euros). 121.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.10, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 121.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000.00

5 x symbol Bet x 250.00

4 x symbol Bet x 62.50

3 x symbol Bet x 5.00

2 x symbol Bet x 500.00

5 x symbol Bet x 175.00

4 x symbol Bet x 50.00

3 x symbol Bet x 5.00

2 x symbol Bet x 250.00

5 x symbol

Bet x 125.00

4 x symbol Bet x 37.50

3 x symbol Bet x 200.00

5 x symbol Bet x 125.00

4 x symbol Bet x 37.50

3 x symbol 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 200.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 100.00 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 25.00 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 125.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 50.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 25.00 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100.00 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 50.00 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 12.50 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 62.50 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 37.50 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 12.50 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 62.50 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 37.50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 12.50 2 x symbol “10” Bet x 5.00 It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Bonus Warriors”, helping the player to Symbol “Wild” make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. It can

appear on the reels 2 to 5. 121.5. Bonus Game. If the symbols “Bonus Warriors”The appear winning on is thedoubled gaming for reels a 1, 3, and 5, the player is offered a bonus game, where, by choosingcombination one of the withthree this symbols, symbol. they can win up to 50 additional spins and the multiplication of the winning by up to 5.

Shaolin Spin

122. Shaolin Spin is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols.

122.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right 122.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The minimum amount of bet is EUR 12.50 (twelve euros and fifty euro cents). 122.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.10, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 122.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 20.00

5 x symbol Bet x 3.20

4 x symbol Bet x 1.00

3 x symbol Bet x 8.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.80

3 x symbol Bet x 4.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.80

3 x symbol Bet x 1.60

5 x symbol Bet x 0.80

4 x symbol

Bet x 0.40

3 x symbol Bet x 1.60

5 x symbol Bet x 0.80

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.60 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.12 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.80 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.12 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Warrior”, helping the player to 5 x symbol “Scatter Warrior” makeBet x 10up andone 20or moreadditional of the spins . The aforementionedwinnings of additional combinations. spins It can are appearmultiplied on by the 3. reels 3, 4, and 5. 4 x symbol “Scatter Warrior” Bet x 6 and 15 additional spins. The winnings of additional spins are multiplied by 3. 3 x symbol “Scatter Warrior” Bet x 4 and 10 additional spins. The winnings of additional spins are multiplied by 3.

Beverly Hills 90210

123. Beverly Hills 90210 is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 122.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 122.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 25 (twenty-five euros). 122.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.10, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 122.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 10.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.60

3 x symbol Bet x 6.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.50

3 x symbol Bet x 2.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.40

3 x symbol Bet x 1.20

5 x symbol

Bet x 0.60

4 x symbol Bet x 0.30

3 x symbol Bet x 1.00

5 x symbol Bet x 0.50

4 x symbol Bet x 0.20

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.10 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.50 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.40 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.30 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.30 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.08 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.30 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.08 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.30 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.16 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.08 Symbol “Wild Car” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Beverly Hills 90210” and

“Transformer ”, helping the player 5 x symbol “Scatter Beverly Hills Bet x 30 and 25 additional spins. Before to make up one or more of the 90210” the additional spins begin, the player aforementioned combinations. It can should choose one of the two of their appear on the reel 3. types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild Car” at random; 2) during

the additional spins, up to 3 reels can become expanded symbols “Wild Car”. 4 x symbol “Scatter Beverly Hills Bet x 15 and 15 additional spins. Before 90210” the additional spins begin, the player should choose one of the two of their types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild Car” at random; 2) during the additional spins,

3 x symbol “Scatter Beverly Hills Betup to x 3 5 reels and can 8 additional become expanded spins. Before the 90210” additionalsymbols “Wild spins Car”. begin, the player should choose one of the two of their types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild Car” at random; 2) during the additional spins, up

Itto can 3 reels appear can onlybecome on the expanded reel 3. It symbols turns“Wild 6Car”. symbols with the smallest Symbol “Transformer” value into other symbols of the

same type.

Paranormal Activity

123. Paranormal Activity is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 123.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Hand”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 123.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.30 (thirty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 6 (six euros). 123.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.2 and then press the button “Spin”. The total amount of bet equals to the coin value multiplied by 30 (Bet). 123.4. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 120

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 400

5 x symbol

Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 30

3 x symbol Bet x 250

5 x symbol Bet x 70

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 200

5 x symbol Bet x 60

4 x symbol Bet x 20

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 15 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 15

5 x symbol “10” Bet x 80 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 15 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Bonus” and “Scatter Hand”, helping 5 x symbol “Scatter Hand” theBet playerx 750 to make up one or more of 4 x symbol “Scatter Hand” theBet aforementionedx 300 combinations. 3 x symbol “Scatter Hand” Bet x 90

123.5. Bonus Game. If three symbols “Bonus” appear on the gaming reels, the player is offered a bonus game, where, by spinning the wheel, they can win one of the following winnings: 1) an unlimited number of additional spins, which end after winning five times; 2) 10 additional spins, in which symbols “Wild” covering the whole reel appear additionally; 3) 15 additional spins, during which more symbols “Wild” can be landed; 4) a winning which is multiplied by the coin value selected when making the spin.

Wisps

124. Wisps is a 5-reel, 243-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 124.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 124.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 25 (twenty-five euros). 124.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.10, amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 124.4. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 40.00

5 x symbol Bet x 8.00

4 x symbol Bet x 4.00

3 x symbol Bet x 20.00

5 x symbol

Bet x 4.00

4 x symbol

Bet x 2.00

3 x symbol Bet x 4.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.00

3 x symbol Bet x 2.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.50

3 x symbol Bet x 2.00

5 x symbol Bet x 1.00

4 x symbol Bet x 0.50

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.60 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 0.20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.50 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.50 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.24 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.30 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.16 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.06 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.30

4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.16 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.06 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.30 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.16 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 0.06 It replaces any symbol, except for the Symbol “Wild ” symbols

“Scatter ” and “Transformer ”, helpingBet x 25 the and player 15 additional to make spinsup one. Before or more 5 x symbol “Scatter ” ofthe the additional aforementioned spins begin, combinations. the player should choose one of the two of their types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild” at random; 2) during the additional spins, the

Betreels x 1,10 2, and or 315 can additional become spins expanded. Before 4 x symbol “Scatter ” thesymbols additional “Wild”. spins begin, the player should choose one of the two of their types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild” at random; 2) during the additional spins, the

Betreels x 1,5 and2, or 15 3 canadditional become spins expanded. Before the 3 x symbol “Scatter ” additionalsymbols “Wild”. spins begin, the player should choose one of the two of their types: 1) during the additional spin, up to 5 symbols turn into the symbol “Wild” at random; 2) during the additional spins, the reels 1, 2,

Betor 3 xcan 2 become expanded symbols 2 x symbol “Scatter ” “Wild”. It can appear only on the reel 3. It Symbol “Transformer ” turns 6 symbols with the smallest value into other symbols of the

same type.

Luxury Rome

125. Luxury Rome is a 5-reel, 9-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 125.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Colosseum”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 125.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.09 (nine euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 18 (eighteen euros). 125.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 2.00 and then press the button “Spin”. 125.4. The amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the coin value by the number of paylines (9) and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”.

125.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

125.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 25

2 x symbol Bet x 800

5 x symbol Bet x 150

Bet x 50 4 x symbol

Bet x 20 3 x symbol

Bet x 500 2 x symbol

5 x symbol

Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol Bet x 450

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol Bet x 400

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol

Bet x 200

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 20

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Bird” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Bonus Knight”, “Bonus Helm”, and “Scatter Colosseum”, helping the player 5 x symbol “Wild Bird” Bet x 1000 to make up one or more of the 4 x symbol “Wild Bird” Bet x 500 3 x symbol “Wild Bird” Betaforementioned x 100 combinations. 2 x symbol “Wild Bird” Bet x 10 1 x symbol “Wild Bird” Bet x 2 5 x symbol “Scatter Colosseum” Bet x 1800 4 x symbol “Scatter Colosseum” Bet x 225 3 x symbol “Scatter Colosseum” Bet x 45 2 x symbol “Scatter Colosseum” Bet x 18

125.7. Instant Bonus. If three or more symbols “Bonus Knight” appear on the gaming reels, the player is offered an instant bonus game, where they can win additional spins and the multiplication of the winning. 125.8. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Helm”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win up to EUR 4,950 by spinning the wheel. Astro Magic

126. Astro Magic is a 5-reel, 9-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 126.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 126.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 18 (eighteen euros). 126.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 2, choose the number of lines of 1 to 9 lines, and then press the button “Spin”. 126.4. The amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the coin value by the number of paylines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 126.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

126.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 25

2 x symbol Bet x 800

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol

Bet x 20

2 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol Bet x 450

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol Bet x 400

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol

Bet x 200

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 15

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 25

4 x symbol Bet x 15

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 20

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 100

5 x symbol Bet x 20

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol

Bet x 100

5 x symbol Bet x 10

4 x symbol Bet x 5

Symbol3 x symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Bonus Moon”, “Bonus Sun”, and “Scatter”, 5 x symbol “Wild” helpingBet x 1000 the player to make up one or more 4 x symbol “Wild” ofBet the x 500aforementioned combinations. 3 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 100 2 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 10 1 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 2 5 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 1800 4 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 225 3 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 45 2 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 18

126.7. Instant Bonus. If three or more symbols “Bonus Sun” appear on the gaming reels, the player is offered an instant bonus game, where they can win additional spins and the multiplication of the winning. 126.8. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Moon”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win up to EUR 4,950 by spinning the wheel.

Cloud Tales

127. Cloud Tales is a 5-reel, 9-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 127.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 127.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.45 (forty-five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 9 (nine euros). 127.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.05 to EUR 1 and then press the button “Spin”. 127.4. The amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the coin value by the number of paylines (9) and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 127.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

127.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 200

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 30

3 x symbol Bet x 100

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 80

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 70 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 40 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 30 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 15

3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, helping the player to make up one or more of the Symbol “Mushroom Island” Itaforementioned can appear only combinations. on the third reel. It replaces any symbol, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. It also Symbol “Egg” generatesIt can appear additional only on symbols the reels “Wild”. 2, 3, and 4. One symbol “Egg” can perform one of the following functions: 1) To turn one or more reels into the expanded symbol “Wild”; 2) to combine the revealed symbols so that they form winning combinations and to multiply the winning by 4; 3) to turn into the symbol “Wild” and to turn other symbols into the symbol “Wild”, also

multiplies the winning by the number that appeared; 4) to turn the reel into the expanded symbol “Wild” and to grant one Musketeer Slot additional spin, during which the symbol “Wild” remains.

128. Musketeer Slot is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 128.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Lady”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 128.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros). 128.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 20 and then press the button “Spin”. 128.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 128.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

128.6. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 50.00

5 x symbol Bet x 10.00

Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol

Bet x 25.00 3 x symbol

5 x symbol Bet x 7.50

4 x symbol Bet x 2.00

3 x symbol Bet x 10.00

5 x symbol Bet x 5.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.25

3 x symbol Bet x 7.50

5 x symbol Bet x 3.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.00

3 x symbol Bet x 5.00

5 x symbol Bet x 2.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.00

3 x symbol

5 x symbol “A” Bet x 4.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 2.00 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.00 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.75 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1.50 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.75 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.50 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.75 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.25 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 1.00 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.25 Symbol “Wild Castle” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Lady”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. It can turn one to five reels at random into expanded 5 x symbol “Scatter Lady” Bet x 2.00 and 20 additional spins symbols “Wild Castle” covering the whole 4 x symbol “Scatter Lady” reel.Bet x 2.00 and 15 additional spins

3 x symbol “Scatter Lady” Bet x 2.00 and 10 additional spins

Ambiance

129. Ambiance is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 129.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter ”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 129.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros). 129.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50 and then press the button “Spin”. 129.4. The amount is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 129.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

129.6. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 250.00

5 x symbol Bet x 100.00

4 x symbol Bet x 20.00

3 x symbol Bet x 125.00

5 x symbol Bet x 25.00

4 x symbol Bet x 10.00

3 x symbol Bet x 50.00

5 x symbol Bet x 7.50

4 x symbol Bet x 5.00

3 x symbol Bet x 20.00

5 x symbol Bet x 5.00

4 x symbol Bet x 2.50

3 x symbol Bet x 15.00

5 x symbol

Bet x 3.00

4 x symbol Bet x 1.75

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 10.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 2.50 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.50 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 3.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 0.75 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 1.00 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.50 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 2.00 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.75 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.35 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 1.50 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.25 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol

“Scatter ”, helping the player to Betmake x 100.00.up one orIf 5more or more of the symbols are landedaforementioned (during different combinations. spins, with the 5 x symbol “Scatter ” same amount of bet), the winning is 5 or more additional spins (as many as the

numberBet x 30.00. of symbols If 5 or more “Scatter symbo ls are” 4 x symbol “Scatter ” collected).landed (during different spins, with the same amount of bet), the winning is 5 or more additional spins (as many as the

numberBet x 10.00. of symbols If 5 or more “Scatter symbols are” collected).landed (during different spins, with the 3 x symbol “Scatter ” same amount of bet), the winning is 5 or more additional spins (as many as the

number of symbols “Scatter ” collected).

Scrolls of Ra

130. Scrolls of Ra is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 130.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Scrolls of Ra”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 130.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros). 130.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 20 and then press the button “Spin”. 130.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 130.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

130.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 5000

5 x symbol Bet x 1000

4 x symbol Bet x 250

3 x symbol Bet x 2500

5 x symbol Bet x 750

4 x symbol Bet x 200

3 x symbol

Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 125

3 x symbol Bet x 750

5 x symbol Bet x 300

4 x symbol Bet x 100

3 x symbol 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 500 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 100 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 400 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 250 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 75 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 200 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 75 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 25 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 25 Symbol “Wild Eye” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Scrolls of Ra”, “Bonus Ra”, and “Bonus Papyrus”, helping the player to The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning make up one or more of the combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1: 5 x symbol “Scatter Scrolls of Ra” aforementioned500 combinations. 4 x symbol “Scatter Scrolls of Ra” 200 3 x symbol “Scatter Scrolls of Ra” 100 2 x symbol “Scatter Scrolls of Ra” 40

130.7. Bonus game “Scrolls Bonus”. If the gaming reels 1, 3, and 5 reveal three symbols “Bonus Papyrus”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win up to 10,000 by choosing one of the papyri that appear. 130.8. Bonus game “Ra Bonus”. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols

“Bonus Ra”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win money prizes by choosing three chests.

Spooky Family

131. Spooky Family is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 131.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Whirl”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 131.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros). 131.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 20 and then press the button “Spin”. 131.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 131.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

131.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 5000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 100

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol

Bet x 2500

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 10

2 x symbol Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 10

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 100

4 x symbol “A” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 30 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 3 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 30 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 3 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 30 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 3 Symbol “Wild Skull” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Scatter Whirl” and “Bonus House”, 5 x symbol “Scatter Whirl” Total bet x 25 helping the player to make up one or 4 x symbol “Scatter Whirl” Total bet x 10 3 x symbol “Scatter Whirl” Totalmore betof the x 5 aforementioned 3 x symbol “Bonus Hand” Thecombinations. randomly appeared symbol can grant a winning of up to EUR 10,000.

131.7. Bonus Game. If three symbols “Bonus House” appear on the gaming reels, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win up to EUR 250,000 by spinning the wheel

Hansel and Gretel: Witch Hunters

132. Hansel and Gretel: Witch Hunters is a 5-reel, 10-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 132.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Crossbow”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 132.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 132.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50 and line bet of 1 to 10, and then press the button “Spin”. 132.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 132.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

132.6. The amount of winning depends on the line bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the line bet is 1:

Combination of symbols Winning 3,000

5 x symbol 250

4 x symbol 50

3 x symbol 3

2 x symbol 1,000

5 x symbol 200

4 x symbol 25

3 x symbol 3

2 x symbol 500

5 x symbol 150

4 x symbol 20

3 x symbol 3

2 x symbol 350

5 x symbol 100

4 x symbol

3 x symbol 250

5 x symbol 50

4 x symbol 15

53 x symbol “A” 125 4 x symbol “A” 30 3 x symbol “A” 10 5 x symbol “K” 125 4 x symbol “K” 30 3 x symbol “K” 10 5 x symbol “Q” 100 4 x symbol “Q” 20 3 x symbol “Q” 5 5 x symbol “J” 100 4 x symbol “J” 20 3 x symbol “J” 5 5 x symbol “10” 100 4 x symbol “10” 20 3 x symbol “10” 5 5 x symbol “9” 100 4 x symbol “9” 20 3 x symbol “9” 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Crossbow”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If the 5 x symbol “Scatter Crossbow” 1,000symbol and is revealed 15 additional on the spins middle reel and 4 x symbol “Scatter Crossbow” forms250 and a winning15 additional combination, spins it expands 3 x symbol “Scatter Crossbow” 100 and 15 additional spins over the whole reel. 2 x symbol “Scatter Crossbow” 20

Nacho Libre

133. Nacho Libre is a 5-reel, 10-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 133.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Nacho Libre”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 133.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 30 (thirty euros). 133.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50 and line bet

of 1 to 10, and then press the button “Spin”. 133.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 133.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

133.6. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 100.00

5 x symbol Bet x 15.00

Bet x 5.00 4 x symbol

Bet x 0.20 3 x symbol

Bet x 75.00 2 x symbol

5 x symbol

Bet x 12.50

Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol

Bet x 0.20 3 x symbol

2 x symbol Bet x 75.00

Bet x 12.50 5 x symbol

Bet x 2.50 4 x symbol

Bet x 0.20 3 x symbol

Bet x 25.00 2 x symbol

5 x symbol

Bet x 7.50

Bet x 1.50 4 x symbol

Bet x 25.00 3 x symbol

Bet x 7.50 5 x symbol

4 x symbol Bet x 1.50

5 x symbol “A” Bet x 12.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 5.00 3 x symbol 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 1.00 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 12.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 5.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 1.00 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10.00 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 2.50 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 0.50 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 10.00 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 2.50 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 0.50 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 10.00 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 2.50 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.50 2 x symbol “10” Bet x 0.20 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Nacho Libre”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If at least one symbol “Wild”

replaces another symbol in the winning combination and the winning is multiplied 5 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 500.00 and additional spins. The by 2. player selects one of the following options: 1) 15 additional spins, during which the landed symbol “Wild”, if it forms a winning combination, expands over the whole reel; 2) 10 additional spins, during which 4 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 20.00 and additional spins. The winnings are multiplied by 3. player selects one of the following options: 1) 15 additional spins, during which the landed symbol “Wild”, if it forms a winning combination, expands over the whole reel; 2) 10 additional spins, during which 3 x symbol “Scatter” Bet x 5.00 and additional spins. The player winnings are multiplied by 3. selects one of the following options: 1) 15 additional spins, during which the landed symbol “Wild”, if it forms a winning combination, expands over the whole reel; 2) 10 additional spins, during which

winnings are multiplied by 3. The Love Guru

134. The Love Guru is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 134.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 134.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 30 (thirty euros). 134.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.20, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 134.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 134.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

134.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 100

3 x symbol Bet x 800

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 20

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 200 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 40

3 x symbol “A” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 200 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Elephant” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “The Love Guru” and “Bonus”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If the symbol “Wild Elephant” is revealed on the

middle reel during additional spins, it 134.7. Instant Bonus. If three or more symbols “The Love Guru” appear on the gaming reels, the expands over the whole reel. player is offered a bonus game, where they can win money prizes. 134.8. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus”, the player is offered a bonus game, where, by selecting boxes, they can win up to EUR 15,000, up to 20 additional spins, and additional symbols “Wild Elephant” on the reels.

Skulls of Legend

135. Skulls of Legend is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 135.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Ship”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 135.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.30 (thirty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 6 (six euros). 135.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.20 and then press the button “Spin”. 135.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and lines. 135.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

135.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1500

5 x symbol Bet x 300

4 x symbol Bet x 70

3 x symbol Bet x 625

Bet x 125 5 x symbol

Bet x 50 4 x symbol

Bet x 500 3 x symbol

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 400

5 x symbol Bet x 80

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 25

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 150

4 x symbol “A” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 75 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 60 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 15 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Skull” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Ship”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If a total of 4 symbols “Wild Skull” are landed on the same reel during 5 x symbol “Scatter Ship” Bet x 2250 and additional spins (one of different spins, this symbol will remain to the options): 1) 7 additional spins, during cover the whole reel for the next 4 spins. which 2 to 5 symbols are turned into the symbol “Wild Skull” at random and remain in their places for 3 spins; 2) 14 additional spins, where the symbols may change their arrangement to form a winning combination if no winning combination is landed during the additional spins; 3) 10 additional spins, during which one symbol located in the middle of the reels may turn into the symbol “Wild Skull”

4 x symbol “Scatter Ship” Betand xturn 900 into and it additionalthe other symbolsspins (one located of the in the same line which is indicated by the options): 1) 7 additional spins, during which compass that appears; 4) 15 additional 2 to 5 symbols are turned into the symbol “Wildspins, Skull” during at which random 1 to and 5 symbols remain inat their placesrandom for may 3 spins; be turned 2) 14 into additional the symbols spins, “Wild Skull”. where the symbols may change their arrangement to form a winning combination if no winning combination is landed during the additional spins; 3) 10 additional spins, during which one symbol located in the middle of the reels may turn into the symbol “Wild Skull” and turn into it the other symbols located in the same line which is indicated by the compass that appears; 4) 15 additional spins, during which

1 to 5 symbols at random may be turned into the symbols “Wild Skull”. 3 x symbol “Scatter Ship” Bet x 450 and additional spins (one of the options): 1) 7 additional spins, during which 2 to 5 symbols are turned into the symbol “Wild Skull” at random and remain in their places for 3 spins; 2) 14 additional spins, where the symbols may change their arrangement to form a winning combination if no winning combination is landed during the additional spins; 3) 10 additional spins, during which one symbol located in the middle of the reels may turn into the symbol “Wild Skull” and turn into it the other symbols located in the same line 2 x symbol “Scatter Ship” Bet x 30 which is indicated by the compass that appears; 4) 15 additional spins, during which 1 to 5 symbols at random may be turned into the symbols “Wild Skull”. Platoon

136. Platoon is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 136.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Bonus Helicopter”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. In additional spins, winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right and from right to left. 136.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.30 (thirty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 30 (thirty euros). 136.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.10, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 136.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 136.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

136.6. The amount of winning depends on the amount of bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the amount of bet is EUR 1:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000.00

5 x symbol Bet x 200.00

4 x symbol Bet x 20.00

3 x symbol Bet x 500.00

5 x symbol Bet x 100.00

4 x symbol Bet x 15.00

3 x symbol Bet x 150.00

5 x symbol Bet x 75.00

4 x symbol Bet x 15.00

3 x symbol Bet x 100.00

5 x symbol Bet x 50.00

4 x symbol Bet x 10.00

3 x symbol Bet x 80.00

5 x symbol Bet x 40.00

4 x symbol

Bet x 10.00

35 x symbol “A” Bet x 70.00 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 35.00 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 8.00 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 50.00 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 25.00 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 6.00 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 40.00 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20.00 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5.00 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 30.00 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 15.00 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5.00 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 25.00 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 12.00 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 3.00 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 20.00 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 10.00 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 3.00 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Bonus Helicopter”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If a winning combination is landed together with one or more symbols “Wild”, the player is granted additional spins until the symbol “Wild” 5 x symbol “Bonus Helicopter” Total bet x 15 and 12 additional spins. leaves the reels after moving one reel to When symbols are landed in an the left with each spin. The winnings of additional spin: 12 additional spins additional spins are multiplied by 3. 4 x symbol “Bonus Helicopter” Total bet x 10 and 10 additional spins. When symbols are landed in an additional spin: 10 additional spins 3 x symbol “Bonus Helicopter” Total bet x 5 and 8 additional spins. When symbols are landed in an additional spin: 8 additional spins

Red Dragon Wild

137. Red Dragon Wild is a 5-reel, 30-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 137.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 137.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The minimum amount of bet is EUR 7.50 (seven euros and fifty euro cents). 137.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.05, line bet of 1 to 5, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 30 and then press the button “Spin”. 137.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 137.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

137.6. . Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1500

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 150

4 x symbol Bet x 40

3 x symbol Bet x 400

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol

Bet x 300

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Warrior” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols “Wild Red Dragon”, “Wild Blue Dragon”, and “Bonus Red Dragon”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. 5 x symbol “Wild Warrior” Bet x 1500 4 x symbol “Wild Warrior” BetMaking x 200 up a winning combination, 3 x symbol “Wild Warrior” theBet symbolx 50 expands throughout the 5 x symbol “Wild Red Dragon” Bet x 1500. It turns random symbols whole reel. (except for the symbols “Wild Warrior” and “Bonus Red Dragon”) 4 x symbol “Wild Red Dragon” Betinto xthe 200. symbol It turns “Wild random Blue symbolsDragon” (except for the symbols “Wild Warrior” and “Bonus Red Dragon”) 3 x symbol “Wild Red Dragon” Betinto xthe 50. symbol It turns “Wild random Blue symbols Dragon” (except for the symbols “Wild Warrior” and “Bonus Red Dragon”) into the symbol 5 x symbol “Wild Blue Dragon” Bet“Wild x 1500Blue Dragon” 4 x symbol “Wild Blue Dragon” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “Wild Blue Dragon” Bet x 50

5 x symbol “Bonus Red Dragon” Total bet x 15 4 x symbol “Bonus Red Dragon” Total bet x 10 3 x symbol “Bonus Red Dragon” Total bet x 5

137.7. Bonus Game. If the gaming reels reveal three or more symbols “Bonus Red Dragon”, the player is offered a bonus game, where they can win up to 20 additional spins by breaking the boxes. The bonus game ends when a blue dragon appears from a broken box.

Jackpot Rango

138. Jackpot Rango is a 5-reel, 25-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 138.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 138.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 138.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 25 and then press the button “Spin”. 138.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 138.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

138.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol

Bet x 20

3 x symbol

Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 15

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 15

3 x symbol 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 5 It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol Symbol “Wild” “Scatter Rango”, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations.

Bet x 150

5 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 50

4 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 20

3 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 2

2 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50. Two symbols on the first reel grant 2 additional spins, during which 2 x symbol the first reel and symbols “Wild” Bet x 20 remain at their places.

3 x symbol Bet x 2

32 orx symbol more symbols “Scatter Rango” 10 additional spins

Mona Lisa Jewels

139. Mona Lisa Jewels is a 5-reel, 25-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 139.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Mona Lisa”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 139.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 139.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 25 and then press the button “Spin”. 139.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 139.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

139.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 20

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 15

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 40

4 x symbol Bet x 15

4 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “9” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “9” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “9” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Ring” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Mona Lisa”, helping the player to 5 x symbol “Wild Ring” Bet x 150 make up one or more of the 4 x symbol “Wild Ring” Bet x 50 aforementioned combinations. 3 x symbol “Wild Ring” Bet x 20 2 x symbol “Wild Ring” Bet x 2 5 x symbol “Jewel” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Jewel” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Jewel” Bet x 20 2 x symbol “Jewel” Bet x 2 symbols on the first reel grant 2 additional spins, during which the symbols “Jewel” and “Wild Ring” 3 or more symbols “Scatter Mona 10 additional spins, during which the remain at their places. Lisa” landed winning combination together with one symbol “Wild Ring” multiplies the winning by 2; if the winning combination is landed together with two symbols “Wild Ring”, the winning is multiplied by 4; if the

winning combination is landed together Neon Reels with three symbols “Wild Ring”, the

winning is multiplied by 8. 140. Neon Reels is a 5-reel, 25-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 140.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Scatter Dice”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 140.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 140.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 25 and then press the button “Spin”. 140.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 140.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

140.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “7” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “7” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “7” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol “Scatter Dice”, helping the player to make up one or more of the 5 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 150 aforementioned combinations. 4 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 20 2 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 2. Two symbols on the first reel grant 2 additional spins, during which the first reel and symbols “Diamond” and “Wild” remain 3 or more symbols “Scatter Dice” at10 their additional places. spins Mega Boy

141. Mega Boy is a 5-reel, 25-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 141.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 141.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 5 (five euros). 141.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.20 and then press the button “Spin”. 141.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 141.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

141.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 2000 4 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 250 3 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 75 2 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Heart” Bet x 1000 4 x symbol “Heart” Bet x 250 3 x symbol “Heart” Bet x 75 2 x symbol “Heart” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Star” Bet x 600 4 x symbol “Star” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “Star” Bet x 50 5 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 500 4 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 175 3 x symbol “Bell” Bet x 25 5 x symbol “7” Bet x 400 4 x symbol “7” Bet x 175 3 x symbol “7” Bet x 25 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 300 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 125 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 250 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 60

3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10

5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 200 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “10” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “10” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “10” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the

symbols , , and , helping the player to make up one or more of the Can give the next ten spins one of the aforementioned combinations. following functions: 1) to double the The symbol landed on the winning; third reel 2) turns the symbols above, under, at the left, and at the right from it into the symbol Can give the next ten spins one of the “Wild”; 3) all the landed symbols “Wild” following functions: 1) to triple the winning; expand over the whole reel; 4) randomly 2) turns the symbols at its angle positions The symbol landed on the selected symbols are turned into the into the symbol “Wild”; 3) turns the third reel symbol “Wild”. symbols at the right, at the left, or from both sides into the symbol “Wild”; 4)

randomly selected symbols are turned into

the symbol “Wild”.

Platoon Wild

142. Platoon Wild is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 142.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right, except for the symbol “Free Spins”, for which winnings are paid out in any sequence. 142.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 20 (twenty euros). 142.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1 and then press the button “Spin”. 142.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 142.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

142.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 1000

5 x symbol Bet x 500

4 x symbol Bet x 100

3 x symbol Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 200

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 100

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 10

3 x symbol Bet x 50

5 x symbol Bet x 25

4 x symbol Bet x 7

3 x symbol Bet x 50

5 x symbol Bet x 25

4 x symbol

Bet x 3

3 x symbol Bet x 50

5 x symbol Bet x 25

4 x symbol Bet x 3

3 x symbol Bet x 25

5 x symbol Bet x 7

4 x symbol Bet x 2

3 x symbol Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol 5 x symbol “Wild” Bet“Free x 2500Spins”, helping the player to make up 4 x symbol “Wild” oneBet xor 1000 more of the aforementioned 3 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 200 combinations. 3 x symbol “Free Spins” 8 additional spins, the winnings of which are doubled

Cherry Trio

143. Cherry Trio is a 3-reel, 5-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 143.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 143.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.05 (five euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 250 (two hundred and fifty euros). 143.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 50 and then press the button “Spin”. 143.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 143.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

143.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning

3 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 70 3 x symbol “Red 7” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Golden 7” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “Blue 7” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “2 BAR” Bet x 5 3 x symbol “1 BAR” Bet x 3 Symbol “Wild Cherries” It replaces any symbol, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. If 3 symbols “Wild Cherries” are revealed on the same reel, the player wins 2 additional spins, during which the symbols “Wild Cherries” remain at their places. If 6 symbols are 3 x symbol “Wild Cherries” Bet x 100 revealed covering two reels, the player

wins 1 additional spin, during which the Million Cents symbols “Wild Cherries” remain at their

144. Million Cents is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the objectplaces. of which is to land a winning combination. 144.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 144.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros). 144.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 10, to select the amount of bet, and then press the button “Spin”. 144.4. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

144.5. The amount of winning depends on the line bet. The winning combinations and the winning when the line bet is 1:

Combination of symbols Winning 5 x symbol “Burning 7” 50.00 4 x symbol “Burning 7” 15.00 3 x symbol “Burning 7” 5.00 5 x symbol “Red 7” 15.00 4 x symbol “Red 7” 4.00 3 x symbol “Red 7” 2.00

5 x symbol “3 BAR” 12.50 4 x symbol “3 BAR” 3.00 3 x symbol “3 BAR” 1.50 5 x symbol “2 BAR” 7.50 4 x symbol “2 BAR” 2.50 2 x symbol “3 BAR” 1.25 5 x symbol “1 BAR” 5.00 4 x symbol “1 BAR” 2.00 3 x symbol “1 BAR” 1.00 5 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” 150 or “Red 7” 4 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” 1.00 or “Red 7” 3 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” 0.50 or “Red 7” 5 x symbol “Cherries” 1.50 4 x symbol “Cherries” 1.00 3 x symbol “Cherries” 0.50 5 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, 1.00 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” 4 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, 0.50 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” 3 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, 0.25 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols 5 x symbol “Wild” 500.00“10”, “0”, and “00”, helping the player to 4 x symbol “Wild” make250.00 up one or more of the 3 x symbol “Wild” 25.00 aforementioned combinations. 2 x symbol “Wild” 2.50 1 x symbol “Wild” 0.25 5 x symbol “Fortune” 100.00 4 x symbol “Fortune” 10.00 3 x symbol “Fortune” 5.00 2 x symbol “Fortune” 1.00

144.6. Special symbols “10”, “0”, and “00”. If the maximum bet is made and these symbols are landed, winnings are granted in the following order:

Super Fast Hot Hot

145. Super Fast Hot Hot is a 5-reel, 25-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 145.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 145.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 125 (one hundred and twenty-five euros). 145.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 0.50, line bet of 1 to 10, and choose the number of lines of 1 to 25 and then press the button “Spin”. 145.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 145.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

145.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning 5 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Watermelon” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 50 3 x symbol “Lemon” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “Grapes” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Grapes” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “Grapes” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Bananas” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “Bananas” Bet x 40 3 x symbol “Bananas” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Orange” Bet x 125 4 x symbol “Orange” Bet x 30 3 x symbol “Orange” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “A” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 20

3 x symbol “A” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “K” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 5 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbol 5 x symbol “Diamond” Bet“Scatter”, x 150 helping the player to make up 4 x symbol “Diamond” oneBet xor 50 more of the aforementioned 3 x symbol “Diamond” combinations.Bet x 20 2 x symbol “Diamond” Bet x 2. Two symbols on the first reel grant 2 additional spins, during which the first reel and symbols “Diamond” and “Wild” remain 3 or more symbols “Scatter” at10 their additional places. spins, during which the landed winning combination together with one symbol “Wild” multiplies the winning by 2; if the winning combination is landed together with two symbols “Wild”, the winning is

multiplied by 4; if the winning combination is Robo Smash landed together with three symbols “Wild”, the winning is multiplied by 8. 146. Robo Smash is a 5-reel, 15-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 146.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 146.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.15 (fifteen euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 15 (fifteen euros). 146.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1 and then press the button “Spin”. 146.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 146.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

146.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Calculation of winning Bet x 500

5 x symbol Bet x 200

4 x symbol Bet x 50

3 x symbol Bet x 250

5 x symbol Bet x 100

4 x symbol Bet x 35

3 x symbol Bet x 150

5 x symbol Bet x 60

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 125

5 x symbol Bet x 50

4 x symbol Bet x 25

3 x symbol Bet x 100

5 x symbol Bet x 35

4 x symbol Bet x 15

53 x symbol “A” Bet x 75 4 x symbol “A” Bet x 25 3 x symbol “A” Bet x 15 5 x symbol “K” Bet x 50

4 x symbol “K” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “K” Bet x 10 5 x symbol “Q” Bet x 35 4 x symbol “Q” Bet x 15 3 x symbol “Q” Bet x 7 5 x symbol “J” Bet x 25 4 x symbol “J” Bet x 10 3 x symbol “J” Bet x 5 Symbol “Wild Robot” It replaces any symbol, helping the player to make up one or more of the aforementioned combinations. It can appear only on the first and fifth reels. If 2 symbols “Wild Robot” are revealed on the

first and fifth reels, the player wins an

additional spin.

Slammin’7s

147. Slammin’7s is a 27-option game, the object of which is to land a winning combination of symbols. 147.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 147.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.50 (fifty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 50 (fifty euros). 147.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1 and then press the button “Spin”. 147.4. The amount of bet equals to the coin value multiplied by 50 and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 147.5. Winning combinations are made up on the reels 1, 2, and 3.

147.6. The winnings are multiplied by the selected coin value. Winning combinations:

Multiply the winning, respectively, by 2, 5, or 10. Grant 5 additional spins, the winnings The symbols of which are doubled

The symbol Add the indicated amount to the winning.

The functions of the indicated symbols are effective only if they are revealed in the

middle on the reel 4 or 5. The symbols

Black Jack Multi Hand

148. Black Jack Multi Hand is a game the object of which is to reach a final score by card values higher than that of the dealer without exceeding 21 points. 148.1. The game uses value tokens, the monetary expression of which in euros is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents), and the maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros) when playing one hand. 148.2. At a time, the player can play either one, two, or three hands. To place a bet(s), before the random number generator deals cards, the player must do it by clicking the button “Click to Bet” and confirm the bet(s) by clicking the button “Deal”. 148.3. When the bet is confirmed, the player and the dealer are dealt two cards each. 148.4. After dealing the cards, the players can perform one of the following actions: 148.4.1. If both additional cards are of the same value, the player can choose to split them (“Split”) into two separate hands with one card. 148.4.2. The player can double (“Double”) their bet. If “Double” is chosen, the player cannot receive more than one (1) card. 148.4.3. If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, the player can insure (“Insurance”) their bet by an additional amount. The bet is insured by a half of the amount of bet made by the player. If the dealer gets a blackjack (e.g. an ace and ten), the insured amount of bet of the player wins. If the dealer fails to get a blackjack, the player loses their insured amount. 148.4.4. Stand – to take part in the game only with opened cards and indicated amount of points. 148.4.5. Continue – to receive an additional card, the sum of whose points will be added to the collected sum of points. 148.5. The player or the dealer will lose the hand if they get more than 21 points (“Bust”). The result of the game is determined by comparing the score of the dealer and the player: 148.5.1 If the player has achieved a higher score than the dealer but not more than 21, the player wins the hand. 148.5.2. If the player and the dealer have achieved the same score (“Push”), a tie is declared

and the player is returned their amount of bet. 148.5.3. If the player has achieved a lower score than the dealer, the bet is lost. 148.5.4. The player wins if the sum of the points of the two first cards dealt to them (e.g. an ace and ten) is 21. In the case, the player collects a winning combination of cards – blackjack. 148.6. The game uses 8 (eight) packs of cards. 148.7. The table of winnings: Result Winning ratio (to the bet)

Winning 1:1

Black Jack 3:2

Insurance 2:1

Black Jack Multi Hand VIP

149. Black Jack Multi Hand VIP is a game the object of which is to reach a final score by card values higher than that of the dealer without exceeding 21 points. 149.1. The game uses value tokens, the monetary expression of which in euros is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros), and the maximum amount of bet is EUR 1000 (one thousand euros) when playing one hand. 149.2. At a time, the player can play one to five hands. To place a bet(s), before the random number generator deals cards, the player must do it by clicking the button “Click to Bet” and confirm the bet(s) by clicking the button “Deal”. 149.3. When the bet is confirmed, the player and the dealer are dealt two cards each. 149.4. After dealing the cards, the players can perform one of the following actions: 149.4.1. If both additional cards are of the same value, the player can choose to split them (“Split”) into two separate hands with one card. 149.4.2. The player can double (“Double”) their bet. If “Double” is chosen, the player cannot receive more than one (1) card. 149.4.3. If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, the player can insure (“Insurance”) their bet by an additional amount. The bet is insured by a half of the amount of bet made by the player. If the dealer gets a blackjack (e.g. an ace and ten), the insured amount of bet of the player wins. If the dealer fails to get a blackjack, the player loses their insured amount. 149.4.4. Stand – to take part in the game only with opened cards and indicated amount of points. 149.4.5. Continue – to receive an additional card, the sum of whose points will be added to the collected sum of points. 149.5. The player or the dealer will lose the hand if they get more than 21 points (“Bust”). The result of the game is determined by comparing the score of the dealer and the player: 149.5.1 If the player has achieved a higher score than the dealer but not more than 21, the player wins the hand. 149.5.2. If the player and the dealer have achieved the same score (“Push”), a tie is declared and the player is returned their amount of bet. 149.5.3. If the player has achieved a lower score than the dealer, the bet is lost. 149.5.4. The player wins if the sum of the points of the two first cards dealt to them (e.g. an ace and ten) is 21. In the case, the player collects a winning combination of cards – blackjack. 149.6. The game uses 8 (eight) packs of cards. 149.7. The table of winnings:

Result Winning ratio (to the bet) Winning 1:1

Black Jack 3:2

Insurance 2:1

Blackjack Atlantic City

150. Blackjack Atlantic City is a game the object of which is to reach a final score by card values higher than that of the dealer without exceeding 21 points. 150.1. The game uses value tokens, the monetary expression of which in euros is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents), and the maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros). 150.2. To place a bet(s), before the random number generator deals cards, the player must do it by clicking the button “Click to Bet” and confirm the bet(s) by clicking the button “Deal”. 150.3. When the bet is confirmed, the player and the dealer are dealt two cards each. 150.4. After dealing the cards, the players can perform one of the following actions: 150.4.1. If both additional cards are of the same value, the player can choose to split them (“Split”) into two separate hands with one card. 150.4.2. The player can double (“Double”) their bet. If “Double” is chosen, the player cannot receive more than one (1) card. 150.4.3. If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, the player can insure (“Insurance”) their bet by an additional amount. The bet is insured by a half of the amount of bet made by the player. If the dealer gets a blackjack (e.g. an ace and ten), the insured amount of bet of the player wins. If the dealer fails to get a blackjack, the player loses their insured amount. 150.4.4. Stand – to take part in the game only with opened cards and indicated amount of points. 150.4.5. Continue – to receive an additional card, the sum of whose points will be added to the collected sum of points. 150.5. The player or the dealer will lose the hand if they get more than 21 points (“Bust”). The result of the game is determined by comparing the score of the dealer and the player: 150.5.1 If the player has achieved a higher score than the dealer but not more than 21, the player wins the hand. 150.5.2. If the player and the dealer have achieved the same score (“Push”), a tie is declared and the player is returned their amount of bet. 150.5.3. If the player has achieved a lower score than the dealer, the bet is lost. 150.5.4. The player wins if the sum of the points of the two first cards dealt to them (e.g. an ace and ten) is 21. In the case, the player collects a winning combination of cards – blackjack. 150.6. The game uses 8 (eight) packs of cards. 150.7. The table of winnings:

Result Winning ratio (to the bet) Winning 1:1

Black Jack 3:2

Insurance 2:1

Blackjack Super 7’s Multihand

151. Blackjack Super 7’s Multihand is a game the object of which is to reach a final score by card values higher than that of the dealer without exceeding 21 points. 151.1. The game uses value tokens, the monetary expression of which in euros is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents), and the maximum amount of bet is EUR 10 (ten euros).

151.2. At a time, the player can play one to three hands. To place a bet(s), before the random number generator deals cards, the player must do it by clicking the button “Click to Bet” and confirm the bet(s) by clicking the button “Deal”. 151.3. When the bet is confirmed, the player and the dealer are dealt two cards each. 151.4. After dealing the cards, the players can perform one of the following actions: 151.4.1. If both additional cards are of the same value, the player can choose to split them (“Split”) into two separate hands with one card. 151.4.2. The player can double (“Double”) their bet. If “Double” is chosen, the player cannot receive more than one (1) card. 151.4.3. If the first card dealt to the dealer is an ace, the player can insure (“Insurance”) their bet by an additional amount. The bet is insured by a half of the amount of bet made by the player. If the dealer gets a blackjack (e.g. an ace and ten), the insured amount of bet of the player wins. If the dealer fails to get a blackjack, the player loses their insured amount. 151.4.4. Stand – to take part in the game only with opened cards and indicated amount of points. 151.4.5. Continue – to receive an additional card, the sum of whose points will be added to the collected sum of points. 151.5. The player or the dealer will lose the hand if they get more than 21 points (“Bust”). The result of the game is determined by comparing the score of the dealer and the player: 151.5.1 If the player has achieved a higher score than the dealer but not more than 21, the player wins the hand. 151.5.2. If the player and the dealer have achieved the same score (“Push”), a tie is declared and the player is returned their amount of bet. 151.5.3. If the player has achieved a lower score than the dealer, the bet is lost. 151.5.4. The player wins if the sum of the points of the two first cards dealt to them (e.g. an ace and ten) is 21. In the case, the player collects a winning combination of cards – blackjack. 151.6. The game uses 8 (eight) packs of cards. 151.7. The table of winnings:

Result Winning ratio (to the bet) Winning 1:1

Black Jack 3:2

Insurance 2:1

151.8. Additional function. The player can make an additional bet in the field marked “7”. The maximum amount of additional bet is EUR 1. The player wins the additional bet, irrespective of the principal bet, if they collect:

Cards collected Winning ratio (to the bet) The 1st card is “7” 3:1 The 1st and 2nd cards are sevens of different suits 50:1 The 1st and 2nd cards are sevens of the same suit 100:1 All the three cards are sevens of different suits 500:1 All the three cards are sevens of the same suit 5000:1

Joker Poker

152. Joker Poker is a card game, the object of which is to collect a winning combination of cards. 152.1. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.01 (one euro cent). The maximum amount of bet is

EUR 5 (five euros). 152.2. To play the game, the player should select a coin value, a number of coins (“Coins”) of 1 to 5, and then press the button “Deal”. 152.3. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of coins. 152.4. The player is dealt 5 cards. The player should click the cards they want to select. Non-reserved cards will be replaced with other by pressing the button “Deal” 152.5. Winning combinations:

Combination 1 coin 2 coins 3 coins 4 coins 5 coins Royal Flush without a joker 800 1600 2400 3200 5000 Four of a kind and a joker 200 400 600 800 1000 Royal Flush with a joker 100 200 300 400 500 Straight Flush 50 100 150 200 250 Four of a kind 20 40 60 80 100 Full House 7 14 21 28 35 Flush 5 10 15 20 25 Straight 3 6 9 12 15 Three of a kind 2 4 6 8 10 Two pairs 1 2 3 4 5 Pair of Aces 1 2 3 4 5

The final winning is calculated by multiplying the sum indicated in the table by the coin value.

152.7. The joker can replace any other cards, helping to make up a winning combination of cards.

Joker Vegas 4 Up

153. Joker Vegas 4 Up is a card game, the object of which is to collect a winning combination of cards. 153.1. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.04 (four euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 20 (twenty euros). 153.2. To play the game, the player should select a coin value, a number of coins (“Coins”) of 1 to 5, and then press the button “Deal”. 153.3. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value by the number of coins. 153.4. The game starts with one hand. The player is dealt 5 cards. The player should click the cards they want to select. Non-reserved cards will be replaced with others by pressing the button “Deal” 153.5. If the player wins in the first hand, they are granted the second hand. The game proceeds in the same way as indicated in Point 153.4. If the second hand is won, the third one is granted; if the third hand is won, the fourth hand is granted. The winning of the second hand is multiplied by 2; the winning of the third hand is multiplied by 4, and the winning of the fourth hand is multiplied by 8. 153.5. Winning combinations:

Combination 1 coin 2 coins 3 coins 4 coins 5 coins Royal Flush without a joker 400 800 1200 1600 3000 Four of a kind and a joker 200 400 600 800 1000 Royal Flush with a joker 100 200 300 400 500 Straight Flush 50 100 150 200 250 Four of a kind 17 34 51 68 85 Full House 6 12 18 24 30

Flush 4 8 12 16 20 Straight 3 6 9 12 15 Three of a kind 2 4 6 8 10 Two pairs 1 2 3 4 5

Pair of Kings or better 1 2 3 4 5 Royal Flush without a joker, consolation prize*

20 40 60 80 100

*Royal Flush without a joker, consolation prize is a situation when the player wins in the first hand but loses in the next one. The player is shown the cards of the remaining (third and fourth) hands. If the combination in the fourth deal is Royal Flush without a joker, the player wins the winning indicated in the table.

The final winning is calculated by multiplying the sum indicated in the table by the coin value.

153.7. The joker can replace any other cards, helping to make up a winning combination of cards.

Punto Banco

154. Punto Banco is a card game, the object to which is to guess who – either the dealer or the player – will collect a combination of cards with a value closest to nine or to guess a tie. 154.1. The game uses value tokens, the monetary expression of which in euros is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). The maximum amount of bet when betting on the dealer, the player, or a tie is EUR 10 (ten euros); the total maximum amount of bet when betting on the dealer or the player and a tie is EUR 20 (twenty euros). 154.2. To place a bet(s), before the random number generator deals cards, the player must do it by clicking the button “Click to Bet” and confirm the bet(s) by clicking the button “Deal”. 154.3. When the bet is confirmed, the player and the dealer are dealt two cards each. If the value of the first to cards received by the player is 0 to 5, they are dealt a third card. A third card is dealt to the dealer according to the table below:

Value of the first two cards in To be dealt if the third card Not to be dealt if the third points of the player is card of the player 0 – 1 – 2 Always Notis allowed 3 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 9 4 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 0 – 1 – 8 – 9 5 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 8 – 9 6 6 – 7 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 8 – 9 7 Not allowed Always pass

154.4. Cards used in the game: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, Jack, Queen, King, and Ace.

Card Card value Ace 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5

6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 0 Jack 0

Queen 0 King 0

154.5. The table of winnings:

Bet Payout Player 1:1 Dealer 1:1 Tie 8:1

European Roulette

155. European Roulette is a game, the object of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a turning wheel (roulette) will stop. The wheel has 37 pockets numbered 0 to 36 inclusively. Each number is assigned either red or black colour, except for 0, which is marked green. 155.1. The game uses value tokens, the value of which is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). Maximum amounts of bets:

Bet Maximum amount of Straight Up bet10 Split 20 Split 0 20 Street 30 Trio 30 Corner 40 Corner 0 40 Six Line 60 Column; Dozen 125 Red/Black; Even/Odd; Low/High 250

Zero’s Neighbours 170 Neighbours (0-36) 50 Thirds 120 Orphans 90

155.2. The player makes bets by clicking on the main and/or additional place(s) of the table. 155.3. The bet table displays numbers 1 to 36 and 0 as well as the outside bets (Columns, Dozens, Red and Black, Evens and Odds; Lows (1-18) and Highs (19-36). 106.4. The player can choose betting on one or several number, colour, evens or odds, or on number groups: 155.4.1. Straight Up – bet is made straight on a single number; 155.4.2. Split – bet is made on a line between any two numbers; 155.4.3. Split Zero – bet is made on a line between zero and the numbers 1, 2, or 3; 155.4.4. Street – bet is made on any three numbers in one vertical column of the table; 155.4.5. Trio – bet is made on a crossing line between 0, 1, and 2 or between 0, 2, and 3;

155.4.6. Corner – bet is made on four numbers that meet at one corner; 155.4.7. Corner 0 – bet is made on a line covering the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3; 155.4.8. Six line – bet is made on at the end of a horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 155.4.9. Column – bet is made on the field at the edge of the table that marks one of the three horizontal rows (12 numbers) of the table; In this case, bet is made on all the 12 numbers in one row, except for 0. 155.4.10. Dozen – bet is made on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12”, and “3rd 12”, which cover twelve numbers, respectively. 155.4.11. Low and High – bet is made on a field marked with numbers “1-18” or “19-36”, each of which covers 18 numbers, respectively. 155.4.12. Red/Black – bet is made on a field marked with red or black colour. This bet covers all numbers which are of either red or black colour, respectively. 155.4.13. Even/Odd – bet is made on the field marked “Even”, which covers all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd”, which covers all odd numbers. 155.5. The winning is determined by the amount of bet made by the player and established winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Straight Up 35:1

Split 17:1 Split Zero 17:1

Street 11:1 Trio 11:1 Corner 8:1 Corner 0 8:1 Six Line 5:1

Column 2:1 Dozen 2:1 Low/High 1:1

Red/Black 1:1

Even/Odd 1:1

American Roulette

156. American Roulette is a game, the object of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a turning wheel (roulette) will stop. The wheel has 38 pockets numbered 0 to 36 inclusively. Each number is assigned either red or black colour, except for zeros, which are marked green. 156.1. The game uses value tokens, the value of which is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). Maximum amounts of bets:

Bet Maximum amount of Straight Up bet10 Split 20

Split 0 20 Street 30 Trio 30 Corner 40

Top Line 50 Six Line 60 Column; Dozen 125 Red/Black; Even/Odd; Low/High 250

Neighbours (0, 00, and 1-36) 50 Finals 0 50 Finals (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 40 Finals (7, 8, 9) 30

156.2. The player makes bets by clicking on the main and/or additional place(s) of the table. 156.3. The bet table displays numbers 1 to 36, 0, and 00 as well as the outside bets (Columns, Dozens, Red and Black, Evens and Odds; Lows (1-18) and Highs (19-36). 156.4. The player can choose betting on one or several number, colour, evens or odds, or on number groups: 156.4.1. Straight Up – bet is made straight on a single number; 156.4.2. Split – bet is made on a line between any two numbers; 156.4.3. Split 0 – bet is made on a line between zero and the numbers 1, 2, or 3; 156.4.4. Street – bet is made on any three numbers in one vertical column of the table; 156.4.5. Trio – bet is made on a crossing line between 0, 1, and 2 or between 0, 2, and 3; 156.4.6. Corner – bet is made on four numbers that meet at one corner; 156.4.7. Top Line – bet is made on a line covering the numbers 0, 00, 1, 2, and 3; 156.4.8. Six line – bet is made on at the end of a horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 156.4.9. Column – bet is made on the field at the edge of the table that marks one of the three horizontal rows (12 numbers) of the table; In this case, bet is made on all the 12 numbers in one row, except for 0. 156.4.10. Dozen – bet is made on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12”, and “3rd 12”, which cover twelve numbers, respectively. 156.4.11. Low and High – bet is made on a field marked with numbers “1-18” or “19-36”, each of which covers 18 numbers, respectively. 156.4.12. Red/Black – bet is made on a field marked with red or black colour. This bet covers all numbers which are of either red or black colour, respectively. 156.4.13. Even/Odd – bet is made on the field marked “Even”, which covers all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd”, which covers all odd numbers. 156.4.14. Finals 0 – bet is made on the numbers 0, 00, 10, 20, and 30. 156.4.15. Finals (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) – bet is made on the numbers ending on the selected number, respectively. For example, if Finals 3 is bet, bet will be made on the numbers 3, 13, 23, and 33. 156.5. The winning is determined by the amount of bet made by the player and established winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Straight Up 35:1

Split 17:1

Split Zero 17:1

Street 11:1 Trio 11:1 Corner 8:1 Top Line 6:1

Six Line 5:1

Column 2:1 Dozen 2:1 Low/High 1:1

Red/Black 1:1

Even/Odd 1:1

Roulette 3D

157. Roulette 3D is a game, the object of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a turning wheel (roulette) will stop. The wheel has 37 pockets numbered 0 to 36 inclusively. Each number is assigned either red or black colour, except for 0, which is marked green. 157.1. The game uses value tokens, the value of which is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). Maximum amounts of bets:

Bet Maximum amount of Straight Up bet10 Split 20 Split 0 20 Street 30 Trio 30 Corner 40 Top Line 40 Six Line 60 Column; Dozen 125 Red/Black; Even/Odd; Low/High 250

Red Splits 80 Black Splits 140

Zero’s Neighbours 170 Neighbours (0-36) 50 Thirds 120

157.2. The player makes bets by clicking on the main and/or additional place(s) of the table. 157.3. The bet table displays numbers 1 to 36 and 0 as well as the outside bets (Columns, Dozens, Red and Black, Evens and Odds; Lows (1-18) and Highs (19-36). 157.4. The player can choose betting on one or several number, colour, evens or odds, or on number groups: 157.4.1. Straight Up – bet is made straight on a single number; 157.4.2. Split – bet is made on a line between any two numbers; 157.4.3. Split Zero – bet is made on a line between zero and the numbers 1, 2, or 3;

157.4.4. Street – bet is made on any three numbers in one vertical column of the table; 157.4.5. Trio – bet is made on a crossing line between 0, 1, and 2 or between 0, 2, and 3; 157.4.6. Corner – bet is made on four numbers that meet at one corner; 157.4.7. Top Line – bet is made on a line covering the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3; 157.4.8. Six line – bet is made on at the end of a horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 157.4.9. Column – bet is made on the field at the edge of the table that marks one of the three horizontal rows (12 numbers) of the table; In this case, bet is made on all the 12 numbers in one row, except for 0. 157.4.10. Dozen – bet is made on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12”, and “3rd 12”, which cover twelve numbers, respectively. 157.4.11. Low and High – bet is made on a field marked with numbers “1-18” or “19-36”, each of which covers 18 numbers, respectively. 157.4.12. Red/Black – bet is made on a field marked with red or black colour. This bet covers all numbers which are of either red or black colour, respectively. 157.4.13. Even/Odd – bet is made on the field marked “Even”, which covers all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd”, which covers all odd numbers. 157.4.14. Red Splits – bet is made on all the red splits: 9/12 + 16/19 + 18/21 + 27/30. 157.4.15. Black Splits – bet is made on all the black splits: 8/11 + 10/11 + 10/13 + 17/20 + 26/29 + 28/29 + 28/31. 157.5. The winning is determined by the amount of bet made by the player and established winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Straight Up 35:1

Split 17:1 Split Zero 17:1

Street 11:1 Trio 11:1 Corner 8:1 Top Line 8:1

Six Line 5:1

Column 2:1 Dozen 2:1 Low/High 1:1

Red/Black 1:1

Even/Odd 1:1

Roulette Silver

158. Roulette Silver is a game, the object of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a turning wheel (roulette) will stop. The wheel has 37 pockets numbered 0 to 36 inclusively. Each number is assigned either red or black colour, except for 0, which is marked green. 158.1. The game uses value tokens, the value of which is indicated on each of them. The minimum

amount of bet is EUR 0.10 (ten euro cents). Maximum amounts of bets:

Bet Maximum amount of Straight Up bet10

Split 20 Split 0 20 Street 30 Trio 30 Corner 40 Top Line 40 Six Line 60 Column; Dozen 125 Red/Black; Even/Odd; Low/High 250

Zero’s Neighbours 170 Neighbours (0-36) 50 Thirds 120 Orphans 90 Finals (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 40 Finals (7, 8, 9) 30

158.2. The player makes bets by clicking on the main and/or additional place(s) of the table. 158.3. The bet table displays numbers 1 to 36 and 0 as well as the outside bets (Columns, Dozens, Red and Black, Evens and Odds; Lows (1-18) and Highs (19-36). 158.4. The player can choose betting on one or several number, colour, evens or odds, or on number groups: 158.4.1. Straight Up – bet is made straight on a single number; 158.4.2. Split – bet is made on a line between any two numbers; 158.4.3. Split Zero – bet is made on a line between zero and the numbers 1, 2, or 3; 158.4.4. Street – bet is made on any three numbers in one vertical column of the table; 158.4.5. Trio – bet is made on a crossing line between 0, 1, and 2 or between 0, 2, and 3; 158.4.6. Corner – bet is made on four numbers that meet at one corner; 158.4.7. Top Line – bet is made on a line covering the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3; 158.4.8. Six line – bet is made on at the end of a horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 158.4.9. Column – bet is made on the field at the edge of the table that marks one of the three horizontal rows (12 numbers) of the table; In this case, bet is made on all the 12 numbers in one row, except for 0. 158.4.10. Dozen – bet is made on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12”, and “3rd 12”, which cover twelve numbers, respectively. 158.4.11. Low and High – bet is made on a field marked with numbers “1-18” or “19-36”, each of which covers 18 numbers, respectively. 158.4.12. Red/Black – bet is made on a field marked with red or black colour. This bet covers all numbers which are of either red or black colour, respectively. 158.4.13. Even/Odd – bet is made on the field marked “Even”, which covers all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd”, which covers all odd numbers. 158.4.14. Finals (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) – bet is made on the numbers ending on the selected number, respectively. For example, if Finals 3 is bet, bet will be made on the numbers 3, 13, 23, and 33.

158.5. The winning is determined by the amount of bet made by the player and established winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Straight Up 35:1

Split 17:1

Split Zero 17:1

Street 11:1 Trio 11:1 Corner 8:1 Top Line 8:1

Six Line 5:1

Column 2:1 Dozen 2:1 Low/High 1:1

Red/Black 1:1

Even/Odd 1:1

Roulette VIP

159. Roulette VIP is a game, the object of which is to guess in which place the ball rolling on a turning wheel (roulette) will stop. The wheel has 37 pockets numbered 0 to 36 inclusively. Each number is assigned either red or black colour, except for 0, which is marked green. 159.1. The game uses value tokens, the value of which is indicated on each of them. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.25 (twenty-five euro cents). Maximum amounts of bets:

Bet Maximum amount of Straight Up bet250 Split 500 Split 0 500 Street 500 Trio 500 Corner 1000 Top Line 1000 Six Line 1000 Column; Dozen 1000 Red/Black; Even/Odd; Low/High 1000

Zero’s Neighbours 4000 Neighbours (0-36) 1250 Thirds 3000 Orphans 2250 Finals (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 1000 Finals (7, 8, 9) 750

159.2. The player makes bets by clicking on the main and/or additional place(s) of the table. 159.3. The bet table displays numbers 1 to 36 and 0 as well as the outside bets (Columns, Dozens, Red and Black, Evens and Odds; Lows (1-18) and Highs (19-36).

159.4. The player can choose betting on one or several number, colour, evens or odds, or on number groups: 159.4.1. Straight Up – bet is made straight on a single number; 159.4.2. Split – bet is made on a line between any two numbers; 159.4.3. Split Zero – bet is made on a line between zero and the numbers 1, 2, or 3; 159.4.4. Street – bet is made on any three numbers in one vertical column of the table; 159.4.5. Trio – bet is made on a crossing line between 0, 1, and 2 or between 0, 2, and 3; 159.4.6. Corner – bet is made on four numbers that meet at one corner; 159.4.7. Top Line – bet is made on a line covering the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3; 159.4.8. Six line – bet is made on at the end of a horizontal line between two adjacent columns; 159.4.9. Column – bet is made on the field at the edge of the table that marks one of the three horizontal rows (12 numbers) of the table; In this case, bet is made on all the 12 numbers in one row, except for 0. 159.4.10. Dozen – bet is made on one of the three fields marked “1st 12”, “2nd 12”, and “3rd 12”, which cover twelve numbers, respectively. 159.4.11. Low and High – bet is made on a field marked with numbers “1-18” or “19-36”, each of which covers 18 numbers, respectively. 159.4.12. Red/Black – bet is made on a field marked with red or black colour. This bet covers all numbers which are of either red or black colour, respectively. 159.4.13. Even/Odd – bet is made on the field marked “Even”, which covers all even numbers, or on the field marked “Odd”, which covers all odd numbers. 159.4.14. Finals (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) – bet is made on the numbers ending on the selected number, respectively. For example, if Finals 3 is bet, bet will be made on the numbers 3, 13, 23, and 33. 159.5. The winning is determined by the amount of bet made by the player and established winning ratio:

Bet Winning ratio Straight Up 35:1

Split 17:1 Split Zero 17:1

Street 11:1 Trio 11:1 Corner 8:1 Top Line 8:1

Six Line 5:1

Column 2:1 Dozen 2:1 Low/High 1:1

Red/Black 1:1

Even/Odd 1:1

Million Cents

160. Million Cents is a 5-reel, 20-line game, the object of which is to land a winning combination. 160.1. All winnings are paid out for symbols that are counted from left to right. 160.2. The minimum amount of bet is EUR 0.20 (twenty euro cents). The maximum amount of bet is EUR 100 (one hundred euros). 160.3. To play the game, the player should select a coin value of EUR 0.01 to EUR 1, select the line bet of 1 to 5, and then press the button “Spin”. 160.4. The amount of bet equals to the product of the coin value and line bet. The total amount of bet is calculated by multiplying the amount of bet by the number of lines and is displayed in the field marked “Bet”. 160.5. Winnings are paid out for symbols that appear on the payline:

160.6. Winning combinations:

Combination of symbols Winning 5 x symbol “Fortune” Bet x 2000 4 x symbol “Fortune” Bet x 200 3 x symbol “Fortune” Bet x 100 2 x symbol “Fortune” Bet x 20 5 x symbol “Burning 7” Bet x 1000 4 x symbol “Burning 7” Bet x 300 3 x symbol “Burning 7” Bet x 100 5 x symbol “Red 7” Bet x 300 4 x symbol “Red 7” Bet x 80 3 x symbol “Red 7” Bet x 40 5 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 250 4 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 60 3 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 30 5 x symbol “2 BAR” Bet x 150 4 x symbol “2 BAR” Bet x 50 2 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 25 5 x symbol “1 BAR” Bet x 100 4 x symbol “1 BAR” Bet x 40 1 x symbol “3 BAR” Bet x 20 5 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” Bet x 30 or “Red 7” 4 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” Bet x 20 or “Red 7” 3 x either of the symbols “Burning 7” Bet x 10 or “Red 7” 5 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 30

4 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 20 3 x symbol “Cherries” Bet x 10 5 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, Bet x 20 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” 4 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, Bet x 10 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” 3 x either of the symbols “3 BAR”, Bet x 5 “2 BAR”, or “1 BAR” Symbol “Wild” It replaces any symbol, except for the symbols 5 x symbol “Wild” Bet“10”, x “0”,10000 and “00”, helping the player to 4 x symbol “Wild” makeBet x 5000up one or more of the 3 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 500 aforementioned combinations. 2 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 50 1 x symbol “Wild” Bet x 5

160.7. Special symbols “10”, “0”, and “00”. If the maximum bet is made and these symbols are landed, winnings are granted in the following order: